OptiX PTN 3900 Hardware Description - (V100R002C01 04)

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series V100R002C01
Hardware Description
Issue Date 04 2010-10-15
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Website: Email:
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description
About This Document
About This Document

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name OptiX PTN 3900 Huawei iManager U2000 Version V100R002C01 V100R002C00
Intended Audience
This document describes the equipment structure, subrack structure and board classification. This document also describes each board of different classes in details. This document helps you get the detailed information on the equipment hardware. The intended audiences of this document are: l l l Network planning engineers Hardware installation engineers System maintenance engineers
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description
DANGER
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
WARNING
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
iii
About This Document
Symbol
Description
CAUTION
TIP
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
NOTE
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.
Changes in Issue 04 (2010-10-15) Based on Product Version V100R002C01

The updates of the document are as follow: Others l l Updates dimensions of certain boards. Modifies the known anomalies.

The updates of the document are as follow: Board Overview Updates the inter-board relation diagram. Processing Boards l
iv
Updates the number of E-Line services supported by the EG16.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
About This Document
Deletes the number of IP/GRE tunnels in the table of functions and features of the EG8 and TN82EX2.

The updates of the document are as follow: Processing Boards l l The number of APS protection groups supported by the TN81EG16 is updated from 512 to 1 k. Description of the functions of the EG16, EG8, EX2, MD1, MQ1, and CD1: Adds the description of the port bandwidth utilization statistics.
Interface Boards Description of the functions of the ETFC, EFG2, EFG4, EFF8, and POD41: Adds the description of the port bandwidth utilization statistics. Others l l l Updates the table providing the board weight and power consumption. Optimizes certain figures. Modifies the known anomalies.

This document is the first release of the V100R002C01 version. The updates of the document are as follows: Subrack l l Updates the tabling describing the mapping relation between processing boards and interface boards. Adds the description of the EG8, TN82EX2, and EFG4 in the table of valid slots for boards.
Board Overview l l Adds the description of the EG8, TN82EX2, and EFG4 to the board type introduction. Updates the diagram showing the inter-board relation of boards.
Processing Boards l l l l l Updates the functions and features of the EG16 and adds the description of the GE electrical interface to the description of the front panel and technical specifications of the EG16. Updates the functions and features of the TN81EX2. Updates the technical specifications of the TN81EX2. Adds the detailed description of the EG8. Adds the detailed description of the TN82EX2.
Interface Boards l Adds the description of the GE electrical interface to the description of the front panel and technical specifications of the EFG2.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
About This Document
Adds the detailed description of the EFG4.
Cross-Connect and System Control Boards l l Updates the working principles and signal flows of the TN81XCS and TN82XCS. Adds the detailed description of the TN83XCS.
Others l l l l l Adds the description of the filler panel. Adds the description of the pluggable optical and pulggable electrical module. Optimizes the description of indicators. Optimizes certain figures. Modifies the known anomalies.

The updates of the document are as follow: Cabinet In the part about the DC PDU, a note about the equipment supporting only the DC-I power distribution mode is added. Subrack l l l The subrack structure diagram is updated. The information about the processing capacity of slots is added. The power consumption of the entire equipment is added in the part of technical specifications of the subrack.
Board Overview l l The inter-board relation diagram is updated. The operating temperature of boards is updated.
Processing Boards l l l l The number of MPLS tunnels supported by the TN81EG16 and TN82EG16 is updated from 8k to 16k. The technical specifications of the optical interfaces on the TN81EG16 and TN82EG16 are updated. The configuration reference of the EX2 is updated. The number of concatenated PWs supported by the AD1 is updated to 512.
Interface Boards l l The technical specifications of the optical interfaces on the EFG2 are updated. The technical specifications of the optical interfaces on the POD41 are updated.
Others l
vi
In the part of technical specifications of each board, the board power consumption is added.
About This Document
l l l l
In the part of interfaces on the front panel of each board, fiber/cable connections to the interfaces are added. In the part of labels for optical modules, the label diagrams, and the mapping relations between optical modules and boards are added. Certain figures and tables are optimized. Known defects are fixed.

This document is the first release of the V100R002C00 version. The updates of the document are as follow: Subrack: Information about the AFO1 is new in section Valid Slots for Boards and section Mapping Relation Between Processing Boards and Interface Boards. Board Overview Information about the AFO1 is new in section Boards and section Inter-Board Relation. The inter-board relation diagram is refreshed. Processing Boards Specifications of the TN81EG16, TN82EG16, EX2, and the CD1 are refreshed. Interface Boards Details on the AFO1 is new. Cross-connect and System Control Boards Details on the TN82SCA is new. Others l l Certain figures and tables are optimized. Known defects are fixed.
Changes in Issue 08 (2009-06-01) Based on Product Version V100R001

Updates in this document are as follows: l l Certain figures and tables are optimized. Known defects are fixed.

Updates in this document are as follows: l l Specifications of the optical interfaces are refreshed. Optical module labels are refreshed.

Updates in this document are as follows:
Issue 04 (2010-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii
About This Document
Known defects are fixed.

Updates in this document are as follows: Cabinet: l l l The appearance of the cabinets is refreshed in section Cabinet. The appearance of the DC PDU is refreshed, and the information about the Short-circuit Copper Connector is new in section Cabinet Indicators and DC Power Distribution. Information about the number of allowed subracks is new in section Technical Specification.
Subrack Information about the EFF8 is new in section Valid Slots for Boards and section Mapping Relation Between Processing Boards and Interface Boards. Board Overview Information about the EFF8 is new in section Boards and section Inter-Board Relation. The inter-board relation diagram is refreshed. Processing Boards l l l Details on the TN82EG16 is new. EX2: Information about that EX2 supports IEEE 1588 V2 clock function is new. Specifications of the EX2 are corrected. Specifications of the MQ1 are refreshed (the maximum of ATM remote service connections supported by the equipment from 512 to 1k, and the maximum of ATM local service connections supported by the equipment from 256 to 512). Specifications of the MD1 are refreshed (the maximum of ATM remote service connections supported by the equipment from 512 to 1k, and the maximum of ATM local service connections supported by the equipment from 256 to 512). Specifications of the CD1 are refreshed (the maximum of ATM remote service connections supported by the equipment from 512 to 1k, and the maximum of ATM local service connections supported by the equipment from 256 to 512).
Interface Boards Details on the EFF8 is new. Cross-connect and System Control Boards l l Details on TN82XCS is new Information about that TN82XCS supports the IEEE 1588 V2 clock function.
Others l l l l
viii
In section Board Indicators, information about indicators on the EFF8 is new. In section Power Consumption and Weight, specifications of the EFF8 are new. Specifications of the 75-ohm 8 x E1 Cable are refreshed. Product nameplate label is refreshed. Known defects are fixed.
About This Document

Updates in this document are as follows: In Section Optical Module Labels, information about the optical module supported by the EX2 is new.

Updates in this document are as follows: Subrack Information about the EX2 is new in section Valid Slots for Boards and section Mapping Relation Between Processing Boards and Interface Boards. Board Overview Information about the EX2 is new in section Boards and section Inter-Board Relation. The interboard relation diagram is refreshed. Processing Boards l l Details on the EX2 are new. Specifications such as local service, remote service, local connection, and remote connection are new for the AD1, MD1,MQ1, and CD1. The parameters that can be set for each board are corrected. Specifications of the EG16 are refreshed (MPLS-Tunnel from 1k to 4k, PWs from 4k to 8k, and APS protection groups from 256 to 1k). Specifications of the MD1 are refreshed (supported PW connections from 254 to 256, and a maximum of 256 ATM remote services supported by the equipment). Specifications of the MQ1 are refreshed (supported PW connections from 254 to 256, and a maximum of 256 ATM remote services supported by the equipment). Specifications of the CD1 are refreshed (supported PW connections from 254 to 256, PWs supported by each port from 127 to 128, and a maximum of 256 ATM remote services supported by the equipment). Specifications of the AD1 are refreshed (the maximum of ATM service connections supported by the equipment from 1022 to 1k). Specifications of the ASD1 are refreshed (the maximum of ATM service connections supported by the equipment from 510 to 512).
l l l l
l l
Interface Boards l l ETFC, EFG2, and POD41: The specifications are refreshed (MPLS-Tunnel from 1k to 4k, PWs from 4k to 8k, and APS protection groups from 256 to 1k). D12 and D75: Slot limitations are new. Information about the DB44 pins is corrected.
Others l l l
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Information about the TPS protection supported by the equipment is refreshed throughout the document. In section Board Indicators, information about indicators on the EX2 is new. In section Power Consumption and Weight, specifications of the EX2 are new. Known defects are fixed.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix
About This Document

The updates of the document are as follow: Cabinet Information about the N63E 2.0 m cabinet is new. The case where the OptiX PTN 1900 subrack and the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack are installed in the same cabinet is also described. In addition, diagrams of cable connections are updated. Processing Boards In the "AD1" section, information about the ATM concatenation is new. Others l l The number of APS protection groups is corrected through the document.The number of APS protection groups is changed from 512 to 256. Some diagrams in this document are optimized.

This document is the first release of the V100R001 version.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Contents
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 Equipment Structure.................................................................................................................1-1 2 Cabinet.........................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Cabinet Types..................................................................................................................................................2-2 2.2 Cabinet Indicators and DC Power Distribution...............................................................................................2-3 2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators.................................................................................................................................. 2-3 2.2.2 DC Power Distribution Unit...................................................................................................................2-4 2.3 Technical Specification...................................................................................................................................2-7
3 Subrack.........................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Subrack Structure and Slots............................................................................................................................ 3-2 3.2 Valid Slots for Boards.....................................................................................................................................3-5 3.3 Technical Specification...................................................................................................................................3-7
4 Board Overview..........................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Appearance and Dimensions of Boards..........................................................................................................4-2 4.2 Board Classification........................................................................................................................................4-5 4.3 Inter-Board Relation........................................................................................................................................4-6 4.4 Board Running Environment.......................................................................................................................... 4-7
5 Processing Boards.......................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 TN81EG16......................................................................................................................................................5-3 5.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................5-3 5.1.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................5-3 5.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................5-5 5.1.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 5-7 5.1.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-10 5.1.6 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-11 5.1.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................5-11 5.2 TN82EG16....................................................................................................................................................5-13 5.2.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-14 5.2.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................5-14 5.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-16 5.2.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-18 Issue 04 (2010-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi
Contents
OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description 5.2.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-21 5.2.6 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-22 5.2.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................5-22
5.3 EG8................................................................................................................................................................5-24 5.3.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-25 5.3.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................5-25 5.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-27 5.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-29 5.3.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-32 5.3.6 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-32 5.3.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................5-32 5.4 TN81EX2......................................................................................................................................................5-35 5.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-35 5.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................5-36 5.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-37 5.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-39 5.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-41 5.4.6 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-42 5.4.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................5-42 5.5 TN82EX2......................................................................................................................................................5-43 5.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-43 5.5.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................5-44 5.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-45 5.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-47 5.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-49 5.5.6 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-49 5.5.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................5-49 5.6 MP1...............................................................................................................................................................5-50 5.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-51 5.6.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................5-51 5.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-51 5.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-53 5.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-55 5.6.6 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-55 5.6.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................5-55 5.7 MD1..............................................................................................................................................................5-55 5.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-56 5.7.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................5-56 5.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-58 5.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-59 5.7.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-60 5.7.6 TPS Protection for Boards....................................................................................................................5-61 xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Contents
5.7.7 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-63 5.7.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................5-63 5.8 MQ1..............................................................................................................................................................5-63 5.8.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-64 5.8.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................5-64 5.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-66 5.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-67 5.8.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-68 5.8.6 TPS Protection for Boards....................................................................................................................5-69 5.8.7 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-71 5.8.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................5-71 5.9 CD1...............................................................................................................................................................5-71 5.9.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................5-72 5.9.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................5-72 5.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................5-74 5.9.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-75 5.9.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-77 5.9.6 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................5-77 5.9.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................5-77 5.10 AD1.............................................................................................................................................................5-79 5.10.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................5-80 5.10.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................5-80 5.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................5-81 5.10.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................5-83 5.10.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................5-84 5.10.6 Board Configuration Reference.........................................................................................................5-84 5.10.7 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................5-84
6 Interface Boards..........................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 ETFC...............................................................................................................................................................6-2 6.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................6-2 6.1.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................6-2 6.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................6-3 6.1.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................6-4 6.1.5 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................6-6 6.1.6 Board Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................6-7 6.1.7 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................6-7 6.2 EFF8................................................................................................................................................................6-7 6.2.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................6-8 6.2.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................6-8 6.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................6-9 6.2.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................6-10 6.2.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-12 Issue 04 (2010-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii
Contents
OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description 6.2.6 Board Configuration Reference........................................................................................................... 6-12 6.2.7 Technical Specifications...................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.3 EFG2............................................................................................................................................................. 6-14 6.3.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-15 6.3.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................6-15 6.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-16 6.3.4 Front Panel........................................................................................................................................... 6-17 6.3.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-20 6.3.6 Board Configuration Reference........................................................................................................... 6-20 6.3.7 Technical Specifications...................................................................................................................... 6-20 6.4 EFG4............................................................................................................................................................. 6-23 6.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-23 6.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................6-23 6.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-24 6.4.4 Front Panel........................................................................................................................................... 6-25 6.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-28 6.4.6 Board Configuration Reference........................................................................................................... 6-28 6.4.7 Technical Specifications...................................................................................................................... 6-28 6.5 POD41...........................................................................................................................................................6-30 6.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-31 6.5.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................6-31 6.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-31 6.5.4 Front Panel........................................................................................................................................... 6-32 6.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-34 6.5.6 Board Configuration Reference........................................................................................................... 6-34 6.5.7 Technical Specifications...................................................................................................................... 6-35 6.6 AFO1.............................................................................................................................................................6-37 6.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-37 6.6.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................6-37 6.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-39 6.6.4 Front Panel........................................................................................................................................... 6-41 6.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-42 6.6.6 Board Configuration Reference........................................................................................................... 6-43 6.6.7 Technical Specifications...................................................................................................................... 6-43 6.7 D75/D12........................................................................................................................................................6-44 6.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................6-45 6.7.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................6-45 6.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................6-45 6.7.4 Front Panel........................................................................................................................................... 6-46 6.7.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................6-50 6.7.6 Board Configuration Reference........................................................................................................... 6-50 6.7.7 Technical Specifications...................................................................................................................... 6-50 xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Contents
7 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards..........................................................................7-1

7.1 TN81SCA........................................................................................................................................................7-2 7.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................7-2 7.1.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................7-2 7.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................7-3 7.1.4 Jumper....................................................................................................................................................7-4 7.1.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................7-6 7.1.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................7-11 7.1.7 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................7-11 7.1.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................7-12 7.2 TN82SCA......................................................................................................................................................7-12 7.2.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................7-12 7.2.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................7-13 7.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................7-13 7.2.4 Jumper..................................................................................................................................................7-14 7.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................7-16 7.2.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................7-21 7.2.7 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................7-21 7.2.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................7-22 7.3 TN81XCS......................................................................................................................................................7-22 7.3.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................7-22 7.3.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................7-23 7.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................7-23 7.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................7-24 7.3.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................7-27 7.3.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................7-27 7.4 TN82XCS......................................................................................................................................................7-27 7.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................7-28 7.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................7-28 7.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................7-28 7.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................7-30 7.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................7-34 7.4.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................7-34 7.5 TN83XCS......................................................................................................................................................7-35 7.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................7-35 7.5.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................7-35 7.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................7-36 7.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................7-37 7.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................7-41 7.5.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................7-41
8 WDM Boards...............................................................................................................................8-1
8.1 CMR2..............................................................................................................................................................8-2 Issue 04 (2010-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv
Contents
OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description 8.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................8-2 8.1.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................8-2 8.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................8-3 8.1.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................8-3 8.1.5 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................8-5 8.1.6 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................8-5
8.2 CMR4..............................................................................................................................................................8-6 8.2.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................8-7 8.2.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................8-7 8.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................8-7 8.2.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................8-8 8.2.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-10 8.2.6 Technical Specifications...................................................................................................................... 8-10
9 Power Supply and Fan Boards.................................................................................................9-1

9.1 PIU..................................................................................................................................................................9-2 9.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................9-2 9.1.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................9-2 9.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................9-3 9.1.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................9-4 9.1.5 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................9-5 9.1.6 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................9-5 9.2 FAN.................................................................................................................................................................9-6 9.2.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................9-6 9.2.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................9-6 9.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................9-6 9.2.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................9-7 9.2.5 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................9-8 9.2.6 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................9-8
10 Filler Panel...............................................................................................................................10-1
10.1 Functions and Features................................................................................................................................10-2 10.2 Appearance and Valid Slots........................................................................................................................10-2
11 Pluggable Optical Modules..................................................................................................11-1

11.1 Appearance and Application.......................................................................................................................11-2 11.2 Optical Module Labels................................................................................................................................11-3
12 Pluggable Electrical Module................................................................................................12-1 13 Cables.......................................................................................................................................13-1

13.1 Fiber............................................................................................................................................................ 13-2 13.1.1 Types of Fiber.................................................................................................................................... 13-2 13.1.2 Connector...........................................................................................................................................13-2 13.2 Power Supply Cable and Grounding Cable.................................................................................................13-4 xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Contents
13.2.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power Cable.......................................................................................13-5 13.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable..........................................................................................................13-7 13.2.3 Subrack Power Cable.........................................................................................................................13-8 13.3 Service Cable...............................................................................................................................................13-8 13.3.1 Ethernet Cable....................................................................................................................................13-9 13.3.2 75-ohm 8 x E1 Cable........................................................................................................................13-14 13.3.3 120-ohm 8 x E1 Cable......................................................................................................................13-16 13.4 Management Cable....................................................................................................................................13-18 13.4.1 Straight Through Cable....................................................................................................................13-18 13.4.2 Crossover Cable...............................................................................................................................13-18 13.5 Clock Cable...............................................................................................................................................13-19 13.5.1 External Clock Cable.......................................................................................................................13-19 13.6 Cabinet Indicator Cable.............................................................................................................................13-20 13.7 Alarm Input/Output Cable.........................................................................................................................13-22
A Indicators...................................................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Cabinet Indicators..........................................................................................................................................A-2 A.2 Board Indicators............................................................................................................................................A-2
B Labels..........................................................................................................................................B-1
B.1 Safety Label...................................................................................................................................................B-2 B.1.1 Labels....................................................................................................................................................B-2 B.1.2 Label Position.......................................................................................................................................B-3 B.2 Engineering Labels........................................................................................................................................B-4
C Power Consumption and Weight..........................................................................................C-1 D Board Configuration Parameters..........................................................................................D-1 E Glossary.......................................................................................................................................E-1
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
xvii
Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 Hardware structure of the OptiX PTN 3900.......................................................................................1-2 Figure 2-1 Appearance of the cabinets used to house the OptiX PTN 3900........................................................2-2 Figure 2-2 Position of cabinet indicators and DC PDU.......................................................................................2-3 Figure 2-3 Appearance of the DC PDU...............................................................................................................2-4 Figure 2-4 Appearance of the front panel of the DC PDU...................................................................................2-5 Figure 2-5 Internal connection of the DC PDU...................................................................................................2-6 Figure 2-6 Appearance of the short-circuit copper connector..............................................................................2-7 Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack.........................................................................................3-2 Figure 3-2 Slot layout of the OptiX PTN 3900....................................................................................................3-3 Figure 3-3 Slot processing capacity of the OptiX PTN 3900...............................................................................3-5 Figure 4-1 Diagram of the inter-board relation of boards for the OptiX PTN 3900............................................4-6 Figure 5-1 Block diagram for the working principle of the TN81EG16..............................................................5-6 Figure 5-2 Appearance of the front panel of the TN81EG16...............................................................................5-8 Figure 5-3 Block diagram for the working principle of the TN82EG16............................................................5-17 Figure 5-4 Appearance of the front panel of the TN82EG16.............................................................................5-19 Figure 5-5 Block diagram for the functions of the EG8.....................................................................................5-27 Figure 5-6 Appearance of the front panel of the EG8........................................................................................5-30 Figure 5-7 Block diagram for the working principle of the EX2.......................................................................5-38 Figure 5-8 Appearance of the front panel of the TN81EX2...............................................................................5-40 Figure 5-9 Block diagram for the functions of the TN82EX2........................................................................... 5-46 Figure 5-10 Appearance of the front panel of the TN82EX2.............................................................................5-48 Figure 5-11 Block diagram for the working principle of the MP1.....................................................................5-52 Figure 5-12 Appearance of the front panel of the MP1......................................................................................5-54 Figure 5-13 Block diagram for the working principle of the MD1....................................................................5-58 Figure 5-14 Appearance of the front panel of the MD1.....................................................................................5-60 Figure 5-15 TPS protection principle of the service sub-board MD1................................................................5-61 Figure 5-16 Hardware configuration of two 1:4 TPS protection groups provided by the service sub-board MD1 .............................................................................................................................................................................5-62 Figure 5-17 Block diagram for the working principle of the MQ1....................................................................5-66 Figure 5-18 Appearance of the front panel of the MQ1.....................................................................................5-68 Figure 5-19 TPS protection principle of the service sub-board MQ1................................................................5-69 Figure 5-20 Hardware configuration of two 1:4 TPS protection groups provided by the service sub-board MQ1 .............................................................................................................................................................................5-70 Figure 5-21 Block diagram for the working principle of the CD1.....................................................................5-74 Issue 04 (2010-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xix
Figures
OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description Figure 5-22 Appearance of the front panel of the CD1......................................................................................5-76 Figure 5-23 Block diagram for the working principle of the AD1.....................................................................5-81 Figure 5-24 Appearance of the front panel of the AD1......................................................................................5-83
Figure 6-1 Block diagram for the working principle of the ETFC.......................................................................6-3 Figure 6-2 Appearance of the front panel of the ETFC........................................................................................6-5 Figure 6-3 Block diagram for the functions of the EFF8.....................................................................................6-9 Figure 6-4 Font Panel of the EFF8.....................................................................................................................6-11 Figure 6-5 Block diagram for the working principle of the EFG2.....................................................................6-16 Figure 6-6 Appearance of the front panel of the EFG2......................................................................................6-18 Figure 6-7 Functional block diagram of the EFG4............................................................................................6-24 Figure 6-8 Appearance of the front panel of the EFG4......................................................................................6-26 Figure 6-9 Block diagram for the working principle of the POD41..................................................................6-32 Figure 6-10 Appearance of the front panel of the POD41.................................................................................6-33 Figure 6-11 Block diagram for the working principle of the AFO1..................................................................6-39 Figure 6-12 Front panel of the AFO1.................................................................................................................6-41 Figure 6-13 Block diagram for the working principle of the D75/D12.............................................................6-46 Figure 6-14 Appearances of the front panel of the D75 and D12......................................................................6-47 Figure 7-1 Block diagram for the working principle of the TN81SCA...............................................................7-3 Figure 7-2 Jumpers on the TN81SCA..................................................................................................................7-5 Figure 7-3 Appearance of the front panel of the TN81SCA................................................................................7-7 Figure 7-4 Block diagram for the working principle of the TN82SCA.............................................................7-13 Figure 7-5 Jumpers on the TN82SCA................................................................................................................7-15 Figure 7-6 Appearance of the front panel of the TN82SCA..............................................................................7-17 Figure 7-7 Block diagram for the working principle of the TN81XCS.............................................................7-23 Figure 7-8 Front panel of the TN81XCS............................................................................................................7-25 Figure 7-9 Block diagram for the working principle of the TN82XCS.............................................................7-29 Figure 7-10 Front panel of the TN82XCS..........................................................................................................7-31 Figure 7-11 Block diagram for the working principle of the TN83XCS...........................................................7-36 Figure 7-12 Front panel of the TN83XCS..........................................................................................................7-38 Figure 8-1 Block diagram for the working principle of the CMR2.....................................................................8-3 Figure 8-2 Appearance of the front panel of the CMR2......................................................................................8-4 Figure 8-3 Block diagram for the working principle of the CMR4.....................................................................8-8 Figure 8-4 Appearance of the front panel of the CMR4......................................................................................8-9 Figure 9-1 Block diagram for the working principle of the PIU..........................................................................9-3 Figure 9-2 Appearance of the front panel of the PIU...........................................................................................9-4 Figure 9-3 Block diagram for the working principle of the FAN........................................................................9-7 Figure 9-4 Appearance of the front panel of the FAN.........................................................................................9-7 Figure 10-1 Appearances of filler panels...........................................................................................................10-2 Figure 11-1 Appearance of the eSFP optical module.........................................................................................11-2 Figure 11-2 Appearance of the XFP optical module..........................................................................................11-2 Figure 11-3 Optical module labels.....................................................................................................................11-3 Figure 12-1 Appearance of the GE SFP electrical module................................................................................12-1 xx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Figures
Figure 13-1 LC/PC optical connector................................................................................................................13-3 Figure 13-2 FC/PC optical connector.................................................................................................................13-4 Figure 13-3 SC/PC optical connector.................................................................................................................13-4 Figure 13-4 Structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and BGND power grounding cable...........................13-5 Figure 13-5 Structure of the cabinet PGND protection grounding cable (JG2&OT)........................................ 13-6 Figure 13-6 Appearance of the cabinet PGND protection grounding cable (JG2&OT)....................................13-6 Figure 13-7 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable................................................................................13-7 Figure 13-8 Appearance of the cabinet door grounding cable...........................................................................13-7 Figure 13-9 Structure of the subrack power cable..............................................................................................13-8 Figure 13-10 RJ-45 connector............................................................................................................................13-9 Figure 13-11 Structure of the straight through cable..........................................................................................13-9 Figure 13-12 Appearance of the straight through cable...................................................................................13-10 Figure 13-13 Structure of the crossover cable..................................................................................................13-10 Figure 13-14 Appearance of the crossover cable.............................................................................................13-11 Figure 13-15 Pin assignment of the straight through cable..............................................................................13-11 Figure 13-16 Structure of the crossover cable..................................................................................................13-12 Figure 13-17 Structure of the 75-ohm E1 cable...............................................................................................13-14 Figure 13-18 Structure of the 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable.......................................................................................13-16 Figure 13-19 Appearance of the 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable...................................................................................13-17 Figure 13-20 Connector structure of the 75-ohm clock cable..........................................................................13-19 Figure 13-21 Connector structure of the 120-ohm clock cable........................................................................13-19 Figure 13-22 Structure of the cabinet indicator cable......................................................................................13-21 Figure 13-23 Appearance of the cabinet indicator cable..................................................................................13-21 Figure 13-24 Structure of the alarm input/output cable connector...................................................................13-22 Figure B-1 Position of labels on the subrack.......................................................................................................B-3
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
xxi
Tables
Tables
Table 2-1 Indicators on the ETSI cabinet.............................................................................................................2-3 Table 2-2 Specifications of the ETSI cabinet for the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack.................................................2-7 Table 3-1 Mapping relation between slots for processing boards and interface boards of the OptiX PTN 3900 ...............................................................................................................................................................................3-4 Table 3-2 Mapping relation between processing boards and interface boards of the OptiX PTN 3900..............3-4 Table 3-3 Valid slots for boards in the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack.......................................................................3-6 Table 3-4 Specifications of the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack...................................................................................3-7 Table 4-1 Appearance and dimensions of boards for the OptiX PTN 3900.........................................................4-2 Table 4-2 Boards and their key functions.............................................................................................................4-5 Table 4-3 Requirements for the board running environment...............................................................................4-7 Table 5-1 Functions and features of the TN81EG16............................................................................................5-4 Table 5-2 Types and usage of the interfaces on the TN81EG16..........................................................................5-9 Table 5-3 Pins for the GE electrical interface......................................................................................................5-9 Table 5-4 Relation between slots for the TN81EG16 and slots for the interface board.....................................5-10 Table 5-5 Technical specifications of the GE optical interface..........................................................................5-11 Table 5-6 Related optical module part numbers of 1000BASE-CWDM optical interfaces and related optical module wavelength allocation..........................................................................................................................................5-13 Table 5-7 Related optical module part numbers of 1000BASE-BX optical interfaces and wavelength allocation .............................................................................................................................................................................5-13 Table 5-8 Technical Specifications of the GE Electrical Interface....................................................................5-13 Table 5-9 Functions and features of the TN82EG16..........................................................................................5-14 Table 5-10 Types and usage of the interfaces on the TN82EG16......................................................................5-20 Table 5-11 Pins for the GE electrical interface..................................................................................................5-21 Table 5-12 Relation between slots for the TN82EG16 and slots for the interface board...................................5-21 Table 5-13 Technical specifications of the GE optical interface........................................................................5-22 Table 5-14 Related optical module part numbers of 1000BASE-CWDM optical interfaces and related optical module wavelength allocation.............................................................................................................................5-24 Table 5-15 Related optical module part numbers of 1000BASE-BX optical interfaces and wavelength allocation .............................................................................................................................................................................5-24 Table 5-16 Technical Specifications of the GE Electrical Interface..................................................................5-24 Table 5-17 Functions and features of the EG8...................................................................................................5-25 Table 5-18 Types and usage of the GE interfaces on the EG8...........................................................................5-31 Table 5-19 Pins for the GE electrical interface..................................................................................................5-31 Table 5-20 Mapping relation between the slots for the EG8 and the slots for the corresponding interface board .............................................................................................................................................................................5-32 Issue 04 (2010-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxiii
Tables
OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description Table 5-21 Technical specifications of the GE optical interface........................................................................5-33 Table 5-22 Related optical module part numbers of 1000BASE-CWDM optical interfaces and related optical module wavelength allocation.............................................................................................................................5-34 Table 5-23 Related optical module part numbers of 1000BASE-BX optical interfaces and wavelength allocation .............................................................................................................................................................................5-34 Table 5-24 Technical Specifications of the GE Electrical Interface..................................................................5-34 Table 5-25 Functions and features of the TN81EX2..........................................................................................5-36 Table 5-26 Types and usage of the interfaces on the TN81EX2........................................................................5-41 Table 5-27 Valid slots for the TN81EX2...........................................................................................................5-41 Table 5-28 Technical specifications of the 10GE optical interface....................................................................5-42 Table 5-29 Functions and features of the TN82EX2..........................................................................................5-44 Table 5-30 Types and usage of the interfaces on the TN82EX2........................................................................5-49 Table 5-31 Technical specifications of the 10GE optical interface....................................................................5-49 Table 5-32 Functions and features of the MP1...................................................................................................5-51 Table 5-33 Functions and features of the MD1..................................................................................................5-56 Table 5-34 Mapping relation between slots for the MP1 that houses the MD1 and slots for the corresponding interface board.....................................................................................................................................................5-60 Table 5-35 Mapping relation between slots for the working boards and slots for the protection boards of the TPS protection for the service sub-board MD1..........................................................................................................5-63 Table 5-36 Functions and features of the MQ1..................................................................................................5-64 Table 5-37 Mapping relation between slots for the MP1 that houses the MQ1 and slots for the corresponding interface board.....................................................................................................................................................5-68 Table 5-38 Mapping relation between slots for the working boards and slots for the protection boards of the TPS protection for the service sub-board MQ1..........................................................................................................5-71 Table 5-39 Functions and features of the CD1...................................................................................................5-72 Table 5-40 Types and usage of the interfaces on the CD1.................................................................................5-77 Table 5-41 Technical specifications of the STM-1 optical interface.................................................................5-78 Table 5-42 Related optical module part numbers of single-fiber bidirectional interface optical interface and wavelength allocation..........................................................................................................................................5-79 Table 5-43 Functions and Features of the AD1..................................................................................................5-80 Table 5-44 Types and usage of the interfaces on the AD1.................................................................................5-84 Table 5-45 Technical specifications of the STM-1 optical interface.................................................................5-85 Table 5-46 Related optical module part numbers of single-fiber bidirectional interface optical interface and wavelength allocation..........................................................................................................................................5-86 Table 6-1 Functions and Features of the ETFC....................................................................................................6-2 Table 6-2 Types and usage of the interfaces on the ETFC...................................................................................6-6 Table 6-3 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector on the ETFC..........................................................................6-6 Table 6-4 Interface specifications of the ETFC....................................................................................................6-7 Table 6-5 Functions and Features of the EFF8.....................................................................................................6-8 Table 6-6 Interfaces of the EFF8........................................................................................................................6-12 Table 6-7 Performance specifications of the FE optical interface......................................................................6-13 Table 6-8 Related optical module part numbers of 100BASE-BX optical interfaces and wavelength allocation .............................................................................................................................................................................6-14 Table 6-9 Functions and Features of the EFG2..................................................................................................6-15 Table 6-10 Types and usage of the interfaces on the EFG2...............................................................................6-19
xxiv
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Tables
Table 6-11 Pins for the GE electrical interface..................................................................................................6-20 Table 6-12 Technical specifications of the GE optical interface........................................................................6-21 Table 6-13 Related optical module part numbers of 1000BASE-CWDM optical interfaces and related optical module wavelength allocation.............................................................................................................................6-22 Table 6-14 Related optical module part numbers of 1000BASE-BX optical interfaces and wavelength allocation .............................................................................................................................................................................6-22 Table 6-15 Specifications of the electrical interfaces on the EFG2...................................................................6-22 Table 6-16 Functions and features of the EFG4.................................................................................................6-23 Table 6-17 Types and usage of the interfaces on the EFG4...............................................................................6-27 Table 6-18 Pins for the GE electrical interface..................................................................................................6-27 Table 6-19 Technical specifications of the GE optical interface........................................................................6-28 Table 6-20 Related optical module part numbers of 1000BASE-CWDM optical interfaces and related optical module wavelength allocation.............................................................................................................................6-29 Table 6-21 Related optical module part numbers of 1000BASE-BX optical interfaces and wavelength allocation .............................................................................................................................................................................6-30 Table 6-22 Specifications of the electrical interfaces on the EFG4...................................................................6-30 Table 6-23 Functions and Features of the POD41.............................................................................................6-31 Table 6-24 Types and usage of the interfaces on the POD41.............................................................................6-34 Table 6-25 Technical specifications of the STM-1 optical interface.................................................................6-35 Table 6-26 Related optical module part numbers of single-fiber bidirectional interface optical interface and wavelength allocation..........................................................................................................................................6-36 Table 6-27 Technical specifications of the STM-4 optical interface.................................................................6-36 Table 6-28 Functions and Features of the AFO1...............................................................................................6-38 Table 6-29 Types and usage of the interfaces on the AFO1...............................................................................6-42 Table 6-30 Technical specifications of the STM-1 optical interface.................................................................6-43 Table 6-31 Related optical module part numbers of single-fiber bidirectional interface optical interface and wavelength allocation..........................................................................................................................................6-44 Table 6-32 Interfaces on the D75/D12...............................................................................................................6-48 Table 6-33 Pins of the 75-ohm DB44 interfaces................................................................................................6-48 Table 6-34 Pins of the 120-ohm DB44 interfaces..............................................................................................6-49 Table 6-35 Interface specifications of the D75/D12...........................................................................................6-50 Table 7-1 Jumpers on the TN81SCA...................................................................................................................7-5 Table 7-2 J20, J23, J22, and J21 jumpers.............................................................................................................7-6 Table 7-3 Types and usage of the interfaces on the TN81SCA...........................................................................7-8 Table 7-4 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface of the TN81SCA...................................................................7-9 Table 7-5 Pin assignment of the ALMI2 interface of the TN81SCA...................................................................7-9 Table 7-6 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 interface of the TN81SCA...............................................................7-10 Table 7-7 Pin assignment of the ETH and EXT interfaces of the TN81SCA....................................................7-10 Table 7-8 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and LAMP2 interfaces of the TN81SCA.........................................7-11 Table 7-9 Pin assignment of the F&f interface of the TN81SCA......................................................................7-11 Table 7-10 Jumpers on the TN82SCA...............................................................................................................7-15 Table 7-11 J26 jumpers......................................................................................................................................7-16 Table 7-12 Types and usage of the interfaces on the TN82SCA.......................................................................7-18 Table 7-13 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface of the TN82SCA...............................................................7-19 Issue 04 (2010-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxv
Tables
OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Hardware Description Table 7-14 Pin assignment of the ALMI2 interface of the TN82SCA...............................................................7-19 Table 7-15 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 interface of the TN82SCA.............................................................7-20 Table 7-16 Pin assignment of the ETH and EXT interfaces of the TN82SCA..................................................7-20 Table 7-17 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and LAMP2 interfaces of the TN82SCA.......................................7-21 Table 7-18 Pin assignment of the F&f interface of the TN82SCA....................................................................7-21 Table 7-19 Types and usage of the interfaces on the TN81XCS.......................................................................7-26 Table 7-20 Pin assignment of the CLK interface of the TN81XCS...................................................................7-26 Table 7-21 Description of buttons on the TN81XCS board...............................................................................7-27 Table 7-22 Types and usage of the interfaces on the TN82XCS.......................................................................7-32 Table 7-23 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface of the TN82XCS..........................................................7-33 Table 7-24 Description of buttons on the TN82XCS board...............................................................................7-34 Table 7-25 Types and usage of the interfaces on the TN83XCS.......................................................................7-39 Table 7-26 Pins of the CLK/TOD interface of the TN83XCS...........................................................................7-40 Table 7-27 Buttons on the front panel of the TN83XCS....................................................................................7-41 Table 8-1 Functions and features of the CMR2...................................................................................................8-2 Table 8-2 Optical interfaces of the CMR2...........................................................................................................8-4 Table 8-3 Specifications of optical interfaces on the CMR2................................................................................8-5 Table 8-4 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the CMR2...........................................................................8-6 Table 8-5 Functions and features of the CMR4...................................................................................................8-7 Table 8-6 Optical interfaces of the CMR4...........................................................................................................8-9 Table 8-7 Specifications of optical interfaces on the CMR4..............................................................................8-10 Table 8-8 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the CMR4.........................................................................8-11 Table 9-1 Functions and features of the PIU........................................................................................................9-2 Table 9-2 Types and usage of the interfaces on the PIU......................................................................................9-5 Table 10-1 Valid slots for filler panels...............................................................................................................10-3 Table 11-1 Boards where the eSFP optical module is applicable......................................................................11-2 Table 11-2 Part numbers and types of optical modules......................................................................................11-3 Table 12-1 Part number and type of electrical module.......................................................................................12-1 Table 13-1 Types of Fiber..................................................................................................................................13-2 Table 13-2 Fiber Connector................................................................................................................................13-3 Table 13-3 Pin assignment of the straight through cable................................................................................. 13-12 Table 13-4 Pin assignment of the crossover cable........................................................................................... 13-12 Table 13-5 Technical specifications of the straight through cable...................................................................13-13 Table 13-6 Technical specifications of the crossover cable.............................................................................13-13 Table 13-7 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable ........................................................................................13-15 Table 13-8 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable.......................................................................................13-17 Table 13-9 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm clock cable...................................................................................13-20 Table 13-10 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable..............................................................................13-21 Table 13-11 Pin assignment of the alarm input(ALMI1).................................................................................13-23 Table 13-12 Pin assignment of the alarm input(ALMI2).................................................................................13-23 Table A-1 Start status indicator combination......................................................................................................A-8 Table B-1 Labels..................................................................................................................................................B-2
xxvi
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Tables
Table B-2 Huawei specifications for engineering labels.....................................................................................B-4 Table C-1 Power consumption and weight..........................................................................................................C-1 Table D-1 Mapping relation between the service type and C2 byte....................................................................D-1 Table D-2 Mapping relation between the service type and V5 byte...................................................................D-2
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
xxvii
1 Equipment Structure
Equipment Structure
The OptiX PTN 3900 equipment consists of the subrack and boards. Figure 1-1 shows the subrack installed in the cabinet.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
1-1
1 Equipment Structure
Figure 1-1 Hardware structure of the OptiX PTN 3900
Cabinet Power distribution unit
Cable distribution plate
Subrack
1-2
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
2 Cabinet
2
About This Chapter
Cabinet
This chapter describes the types, configuration and technical specifications of the cabinet. 2.1 Cabinet Types The OptiX PTN 3900 can be installed in a 300 mm deep ETSI cabinet (N63E cabinet or T63 cabinet). 2.2 Cabinet Indicators and DC Power Distribution On the top of the ETSI cabinet, there are cabinet indicators and a DC power distribution unit (PDU). 2.3 Technical Specification Technical specifications of the cabinet cover the types, dimensions, weight of the cabinet, and the number of subracks configured in a cabinet.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
2-1
2 Cabinet
2.1 Cabinet Types

The OptiX PTN 3900 can be installed in a 300 mm deep ETSI cabinet (N63E cabinet or T63 cabinet).
NOTE
The OptiX PTN 3900 does not support outdoor installation.
Figure 2-1 shows the cabinets used to house the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack. Figure 2-1 Appearance of the cabinets used to house the OptiX PTN 3900
T63 cabinet
N63E cabinet
2-2
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
2 Cabinet
2.2 Cabinet Indicators and DC Power Distribution

On the top of the ETSI cabinet, there are cabinet indicators and a DC power distribution unit (PDU). Figure 2-2 shows the position of the cabinet indicators and the DC PDU. Figure 2-2 Position of cabinet indicators and DC PDU
Cabinet indicator DC PDU
2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators Cabinet indicators are on the top of the ETSI cabinet. The cabinet indicators indicate the power supply status and the severity of current alarms generated in the equipment. Observing the cabinet indicators, you can acknowledge the current running status of the equipment. 2.2.2 DC Power Distribution Unit The DC power distribution unit (PDU) is located under the cabinet indicates and installed in the ESTI cabinet to input the external power supply. The DC PDU provides the -48 V or -60 V DC power supply to the PIU. The DC PDU, which uses the magnetic circuit breaker, can be flexibly configured.
2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators

Cabinet indicators are on the top of the ETSI cabinet. The cabinet indicators indicate the power supply status and the severity of current alarms generated in the equipment. Observing the cabinet indicators, you can acknowledge the current running status of the equipment. The indicators on the ETSI cabinet are of four colors, as shown in Figure 2-2. Table 2-1 provides the description of the cabinet indicators. Table 2-1 Indicators on the ETSI cabinet Indicator Power indicator, which is green Status Lit. Indication The power is supplied to the equipment.
2-3
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
2 Cabinet
Indicator
Status Unlit.
Indication No power is supplied to the equipment. Critical alarms are generated in the equipment. No critical alarms are generated in the equipment. Major alarms are generated in the equipment. No major alarms are generated in the equipment. Minor alarms are generated in the equipment. No minor alarms are generated in the equipment.
Critical alarm indicator, which is red
Lit. Unlit.
Major alarm indicator, which is orange
Lit. Unlit.
Minor alarm indicator, which is yellow
Lit. Unlit.
NOTE
The cabinet indicators are driven by boards in the subrack. The cabinet indicators can be lit only after the alarm cables are correctly connected and the subrack is powered on. For details of the alarm cable, see 13.7 Alarm Input/Output Cable.
2.2.2 DC Power Distribution Unit

The DC power distribution unit (PDU) is located under the cabinet indicates and installed in the ESTI cabinet to input the external power supply. The DC PDU provides the -48 V or -60 V DC power supply to the PIU. The DC PDU, which uses the magnetic circuit breaker, can be flexibly configured. Figure 2-3 shows the appearance of the DC PDU. Figure 2-3 Appearance of the DC PDU
Figure 2-4 shows the appearance of the front panel of the DC PDU.
2-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
2 Cabinet
Figure 2-4 Appearance of the front panel of the DC PDU
RTN(+) NEG(-) 1
RTN(+) NEG(-) 2
RTN(+) NEG(-) 3
RTN(+) NEG(-) 4
RTN(+) NEG(-) 1
RTN(+) NEG(-) 2
RTN(+) NEG(-) 3
RTN(+) NEG(-) 4
SW1 1 2 3 4
+ 1
SW2
+ 2
SW3
+ 3
SW4
+ 4
SW1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
+ 1
SW2
+ 2
SW3
+ 3
SW4
+ 4
OUTPUT A
INPUT A
INPUT B
OUTPUT B
A
1. Power supply input area 2. Power supply switch area 3. Power supply output area
B
4. Grounding scheme indication hole
A. Area A of the DC PDU B. Area B of the DC PDU

NOTE
Area A and area B serve as mutual backups.
CAUTION
The DC PDU should be maintained when the power supply is normal. Area A and area B, which serve as mutual backups, cannot be maintained at the same time.
The DC PDU consists of the following areas. l l l Power supply input area: This area provides eight channels of power input terminals, which are used to access eight channels of DC power supplies. Power supply switch area: Eight switches, which are used to control the output of the power supply, are present at the left and right sides of the DC PDU (four at each side). Power supply output area: Eight groups of power terminals are present at the left and right sides of the DC PDU (four groups at each side) . Eight groups of power terminals correspond to eight power switches at the left and right sides of the DC PDU (four at each side).
Functions and Features

Functions and features of the DC PDU are listed as follows: l The DC PDU supports the input and output of eight channels (four active and four standby) of stand-alone power supplies. The input DC voltage ranges from -38.4 V to -57.6 V or -48 V to -72 V. The output current of each channel ranges from 0 A to 50 A. Dual OT terminals, which are used to input and output the power supply, are used. The dual OT terminals can effectively prevent cables from rotating or being loosened.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-5
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
2 Cabinet
l l
Area A and area B of the DC PDU serve as mutual hot backups. The DC PDU supports the external power supply equal to or larger than 50 A and supports the fuse capacity of 50 A. If the backup is available, the switch can be removed or replaced when the power is on. For details, see OptiX PTN 3900 Quick Installation Guide. The DC PDU supports two grounding schemes, DC-C and DC-I, while the OptiX PTN 3900 only supports the DC-I scheme.
NOTE
For the DC-C scheme, DC return conductors at multiple points can be connected to the common grounding network. For the DC-I scheme, the DC return conductor at only one point can be connected to the common grounding network. The short-circuit copper bar inside the DC PDU determines whether the DC-C or DCI scheme is used. You can check whether the short-circuit copper bar is available by looking through the grounding scheme indication hole on the front panel of the DC PDU. If the short-circuit copper bar is available, the grounding scheme is DC-C. Otherwise, the grounding scheme is DC-I. Figure 2-4 shows the grounding scheme indication hole.
Internal Connection
The internal connection of the DC PDU is shown in Figure 2-5. Figure 2-5 Internal connection of the DC PDU
Power output terminal NEG(-) Power supply switchfor the subrack Power input terminal RTN(+)
OUTPUT A
- - - -
OUTPUT B
1 2 3 4
ON ON ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
- - - -
++ + ++++ +
INPUT A INPUT B
1 2 3 4
ON ON ON ON
OUTPUT A
++++
1 2 3 4
OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
OFF OFF OFF OFF
OUTPUT B
- - - - - - - INPUT A INPUT B
++++
1 2 3 4
Power output terminal RTN(+)
Power input terminal NEG(-)
External Connection
The DC PDU accesses four 63 A external power supplies. You can use a short-circuit copper connector at the input area of the DC PDU to divide the four power supplies in eight power
2 Cabinet
supplies to two OptiX PTN 3900 subracks at the same time. Figure 2-6 shows the appearance of the short-circuit copper connector. Figure 2-6 Appearance of the short-circuit copper connector
The DC PDU can provide power supplies to two OptiX PTN 3900 subracks at the same time, each of which can access four channels of power supplies. Two PIU boards are present in each subrack. Each PIU can access two channels of power supplies to provide power supplies to the subrack. The two PIU boards use the 1+1 backup scheme. When one PIU fails, the other PIU can ensure the normal running of the equipment. The DC PDU can provide power supply to the independently installed OptiX PTN 3900 subrack, or provide power supplies to the OptiX PTN 3900 and OptiX PTN 1900 subracks installed in the same cabinet. When the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack is independently installed, for the connection between the DC PDU and OptiX PTN 3900 subrack, see the OptiX PTN 3900 Quick Installation Guide.When the OptiX PTN 3900 and OptiX PTN 1900 subracks are installed in the same cabinet, for the connection among the DC PDU, OptiX PTN 1900 subrack, and OptiX PTN 3900 subrack, see the OptiX PTN 1900 Quick Installation Guide.
2.3 Technical Specification

Technical specifications of the cabinet cover the types, dimensions, weight of the cabinet, and the number of subracks configured in a cabinet. Table 2-2 lists the technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet of the OptiX PTN 3900. Table 2-2 Specifications of the ETSI cabinet for the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack Number of Allowed OptiX PTN 3900 Subracks 2 Number of Allowed OptiX PTN 1900 Subracks 4 Number of Allowed OptiX PTN 3900 and OptiX PTN 1900 Subracks 1 x OptiX PTN 3900 Subrack and 2 x OptiX PTN 1900 Subrack
Cabinet Type
Dimensio ns (mm)
Weight (kg)
300 mm deep ETSI cabinet (T63)
600 (width) x 300 (depth) x 2200 (height)
60
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
2-7
2 Cabinet
Cabinet Type
Dimensio ns (mm)
Weight (kg)
Number of Allowed OptiX PTN 3900 Subracks 1
Number of Allowed OptiX PTN 1900 Subracks 4
Number of Allowed OptiX PTN 3900 and OptiX PTN 1900 Subracks 1 x OptiX PTN 3900 Subrack and 2 x OptiX PTN 1900 Subrack 1 x OptiX PTN 3900 Subrack and 2 x OptiX PTN 1900 Subrack
300 mm deep ETSI cabinet (N63E)
600 (width) x 300 (depth) x 2000 (height) 600 (width) x 300 (depth) x 2200 (height)
42
45
2-8
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
3 Subrack
3
About This Chapter
Subrack
The subrack, which is used to house various types of boards, is the basic unit of the OptiX PTN 3900. 3.1 Subrack Structure and Slots The OptiX PTN 3900 subrack is of a dual-layer structure. The subrack consists of processing board area, interface board area, switching fabric area, system control board area, power supply board area, fan area and fiber routing trough. 3.2 Valid Slots for Boards On the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack, 40 slots are available, covering the 16 slots for processing boards, 16 slots for interface boards, two slots for switching boards, two slots for system control boards, two slots for PIU boards, and two slots for FAN boards. 3.3 Technical Specification Technical specifications of the subrack cover the dimensions, weight, maximum power consumption, voltage range and maximum current.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
3-1
3 Subrack
3.1 Subrack Structure and Slots

The OptiX PTN 3900 subrack is of a dual-layer structure. The subrack consists of processing board area, interface board area, switching fabric area, system control board area, power supply board area, fan area and fiber routing trough.
Subrack Structure
Figure 3-1 shows the structure of the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack. Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack
Fiber routing trough
Air filter
Interface board area Processing board area
Power supply board area Switching board area
System control board area Fan area
Functions of these areas of the subrack are as follows. l l l Processing board area, which is used to house the processing boards and service subboards. Interface board area, which is used to house the interface boards. System control board area, which is used to house the system control, communication and auxiliary processing board (SCA).
3-2
3 Subrack
l l l l
Switching fabric area, which is used to house the cross-connect and timing board (XCS). Power supply board area, which is used to house the power supply boards. Fan area, which is used to house the fan tray assembly. Fiber routing trough, which is used to route fibers and external clock cables.
Slot Allocation
The OptiX PTN 3900 subrack consists of the upper layer and lower layers. The upper layer contains 20 slots and the lower layer contains 18 slots. In addition, there are two slots for FAN boards. In total, 40 slots are available on the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack. Figure 3-2 shows the position of each slot in the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack. Figure 3-2 Slot layout of the OptiX PTN 3900
S L O T
S L O T
S L O T
S L O T
S L O T
S L O T
S L O T
S P L I O U T
P I U
S C A
S C A
S L O T
S L O T
S L O T
S L O T
S L O T
S L O T
S L O T
S L O T
1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 27 28 29 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fan SLOT 39
S L O T 1
S L O T 2
S L O T 3
S L O T 4
S L O T 5
S L O T 6
S L O T 7
S L O T 8
X C S 9
X C S 10
S L O T 1 1
S L O T 1 2
S L O T 1 3
S L O T 1 4
S L O T 1 5
S L O T 1 6
S L O T 1 7
S L O T 1 8
Fiber routing trough Fan SLOT 40 Air filter
Mapping Relation Between Processing Boards and Interface Boards

Table 3-1 lists the mapping relation between slots for processing boards and interface boards.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-3
3 Subrack
Table 3-1 Mapping relation between slots for processing boards and interface boards of the OptiX PTN 3900 Slots for Processing Boards Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slots 5-8 Slots 11-14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17 Slot 18 Slots for Interface Boards Slots 19 - 20 Slots 21 - 22 Slots 23 - 24 Slots 25 - 26 Slots 31 - 32 Slots 33 - 34 Slots 35 - 36 Slots 37 - 38
Table 3-2 lists the mapping relation between processing boards and interface boards. Table 3-2 Mapping relation between processing boards and interface boards of the OptiX PTN 3900 Processing Board MP1 Service Sub-Board MD1, MQ1 AD1, CD1 EG16, EG8 EX2 Interface Board D75, D12 ETFC, EFG2, EFG4, POD41, EFF8, AFO1 -
Slot Processing Capacity

Figure 3-3 lists the processing capacity of each slot in the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack.
3-4
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
3 Subrack
Figure 3-3 Slot processing capacity of the OptiX PTN 3900
S L O T
S L O T
S L O T
S L O T
S L O T
S L O T
S L O T
S P L I O U T 2 7
P I U 2 8
S C A 2 9
S S S S C L L L A O O O T T T 3 0
S L O T
S L O T
S L O T
S L O T
S L O T
1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fan SLOT 39 S L O T 1 2 0 G b i t / s S L O T 2 2 0 G b i t / s S L O T 3 2 0 G b i t / s S L O T 4 2 0 G b i t / s S L O T 5 2 0 G b i t / s S L O T 6 2 0 G b i t / s S L O T 7 2 0 G b i t / s S L O T 8 2 0 G b i t / s X C S 9 X C S 1 0 S L O T 1 1 2 0 G b i t / s S L O T 1 2 2 0 G b i t / s S L O T 1 3 2 0 G b i t / s S L O T 1 4 2 0 G b i t / s S L O T 1 5 2 0 G b i t / s S L O T 1 6 2 0 G b i t / s S L O T 1 7 2 0 G b i t / s S L O T 1 8 2 0 G b i t / s
Fiber routing trough Fan SLOT 40 Air filter
NOTE
The service signals accessed by the interface board are processed by the processing board in the corresponding slot. The capacity of each processing slot is 20 Gbit/s.
3.2 Valid Slots for Boards

On the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack, 40 slots are available, covering the 16 slots for processing boards, 16 slots for interface boards, two slots for switching boards, two slots for system control boards, two slots for PIU boards, and two slots for FAN boards. Table 3-3 lists the valid slots for boards in the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack.
3 Subrack
Table 3-3 Valid slots for boards in the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack Board SCA Full Name System control, communication and auxiliary processing unit Cross-connect and synchronous timing unit Power interface unit Fan board 2-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet Switching Processing Board 2-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet Switching Processing Board 16-port GE Ethernet processing board 8-port GE Ethernet processing board Multi-protocol (TDM/IMA/ ATM/ML-PPP) multiinterface (E1/STM-1) mother processing board 32 x E1 service sub-board Valid Slot Slots 29 - 30 Remarks -
XCS PIU FAN TN81EX2 TN82EX2 EG16 EG8 MP1
Slots 9 - 10 Slots 27 - 28 Slots 39 - 40 Slots 1, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 15, and 17 Slots 1 - 8 and 11 18 Slots 1, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 15, and 17 Slots 1 - 8 and 11 18 Slots 1 - 8 and 11 18
One TN81EX2 occupies two slots. One TN82EX2 occupies one slot. One EG16 occupies two slots. -
MD1
Slots 1 - 5 and 14 18
The MD1 should be jointly used with the MP1 and interface board. The MQ1 should be jointly used with the MP1 and interface board. The CD1 should be jointly used with the MP1. The AD1 should be jointly used with the MP1. The AFO1 should be jointly used with the EG16/EG8. The ETFC should be jointly used with the EG16/EG8.
MQ1
63 x E1 service sub-board
Slots 1 - 5 and 14 18
CD1
2-port channelized STM-1 sub-board 2-port ATM STM-1 subboard 8 x ATM STM-1 interface board 12 x FE electrical interface board
Slots 1 - 8 and 11 18 Slots 1 - 8 and 11-18 Slots 19 - 26 and 31 - 38 Slots 19 - 26 and 31 - 38
AD1
AFO1
ETFC
3-6
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
3 Subrack
Board EFF8
Full Name 8 x FE optical interface board
Valid Slot Slots 19 - 26 and 31 - 38 Slots 19 - 26 and 31 - 38 Slots 19 - 26 and 31 - 38 Slots 19 - 26 and 31 - 38 Slots 19 - 26 and 31 - 38
Remarks The EFF8 should be jointly used with the EG16/EG8. The EFG2 should be jointly used with the EG16/EG8. The EFG4 should be jointly used with the EG8. The POD41 should be jointly used with the EG16/EG8. The D12 should be jointly used with the MD1 and MP1, or MQ1 and MP1. The D75 should be jointly used with the MD1 and MP1, or MQ1 and MP1. -
EFG2
2 x GE optical interface board 4 x GE optical interface board 2 x STM-4/STM-1 POS interface board 32 x E1 120-ohm electrical interface board
EFG4
POD41
D12
D75
32 x E1 75-ohm electrical interface board
Slots 19 - 26 and 31 - 38
CMR2 CMR4
2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
Slots 1 - 8 and 11 18 Slots 1 - 8 and 11 18
3.3 Technical Specification

Technical specifications of the subrack cover the dimensions, weight, maximum power consumption, voltage range and maximum current. Table 3-4 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack. Table 3-4 Specifications of the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack Item Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Specification 496 (width) x 295 (depth) x 800 (height) Empty subrack: 35 (no boards or air filter housed) Fully configured subrack: 60
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
3-7
3 Subrack
Item Power consumption Heat dissipation (W, with typical configuration, room temperature)
Specification l Typical configuration I (With system protection and TPS protection): Power consumption: 570 Heat dissipation: 570 Configuration: 2 x 10GE + 8 x ATM STM-1 + 2 x channelized STM-1 + 8 x GE + 63 x E1 l Typical configuration II (With system protection and TPS protection): Power consumption: 480 Heat dissipation: 480 Configuration: 2 x 10GE + 16 x GE+63 x E1 l Typical configuration III (With system protection): Power consumption: 755 Heat dissipation: 755 Configuration: 6 x 10GE + 8 x channelized STM-1 + 16 x GE l Typical configuration IV (With system protection): Power consumption: 410 Heat dissipation: 410 Configuration: 2 x 10GE + 16 x GE + 8 x FE
Voltage range (V, DC)
-38.4 to -57.6 (-48 V power supply) -48.0 to -72.0 (-60 V power supply)
3-8
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
4 Board Overview
4
About This Chapter
4.1 Appearance and Dimensions of Boards Appearance and dimensions vary with types of boards.
Board Overview
This section describes the appearance, dimension, classification, inter-board relation, and running environment of boards.
4.2 Board Classification Boards of the OptiX PTN 3900 include the processing board, WDM board, service sub-board, interface board, cross-connect and timing board, system control, communication and auxiliary processing board, fan board and power supply board. 4.3 Inter-Board Relation Boards for the OptiX PTN 3900 are used together to provide various functions for the equipment. 4.4 Board Running Environment The equipment should be running in the qualified environment, and thus boards can run normally.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
4-1
4 Board Overview
4.1 Appearance and Dimensions of Boards

Appearance and dimensions vary with types of boards. Table 4-1 provides the appearance and dimensions of boards for the OptiX PTN 3900. Table 4-1 Appearance and dimensions of boards for the OptiX PTN 3900 Board type Processing board (Such as EG16) Appearance Dimensions (mm) 50.8 (width) x 266.8 (depth) x 261.4 (height)
Mother processing board (Such as MP1)
25.4 (width) x 266.8 (depth) x 261.4 (height)
4-2
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
4 Board Overview
Board type Service sub-board (Such as AD1)
Appearance
Dimensions (mm) 25.4 (width) x 197.1 (depth) x 128.1 (height)
Interface board (Such as ETFC)
22 (width) x 156.9 (depth) x 261.4 (height)
Cross-connect and timing board (XCS)
25.4 (width) x 266.8 (depth) x 261.4 (height)
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
4-3
4 Board Overview
Board type Cross-connect and timing board (SCA)
Appearance
Dimensions (mm) 22 (width) x 271.5 (depth) x 261.4 (height)
Fan board (FAN) Power supply board (PIU)
66.5 (height) x 278.4 (depth) x 492.0 (width) 40.0 (width) x 272.4 (depth) x 261.4 (height)
NOTE
H D
4-4
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
4 Board Overview
4.2 Board Classification

Boards of the OptiX PTN 3900 include the processing board, WDM board, service sub-board, interface board, cross-connect and timing board, system control, communication and auxiliary processing board, fan board and power supply board. Table 4-2 lists the boards of the OptiX PTN 3900 and their functions. Table 4-2 Boards and their key functions Board Type Processing board Board Name EX2, EG16, EG8 Key Function Accesses and processes 10GE and GE signals, and processes the FE, GE, ATM STM-1, and POS STM-1/ STM-4 signals accessed by the interface boards. The processing motherboard works with the service subboards to access channelized STM-1 and ATM STM-1 signals, and processes E1 signals. Adds or drops coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) signals. Accesses FE, GE, POS STM-1/STM-4, ATM STM-1, and E1 signals. Grooms services. Provides the clock and time . SCA Performs the system control function. Provides the auxiliary interfaces. FAN PIU Dissipates heat for boards. Accesses the external power supply.
Processing motherboard Service sub-board
MP1 MD1, MQ1, CD1, AD1
WDM board
CMR2, CMR4
Interface board
ETFC, EFG2, EFG4, POD41, D12, D75, EFF8, AFO1 XCS
Cross-connect and timing board System control, communication and auxiliary processing board
Fan board Power supply board
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
4-5
4 Board Overview
Board Type
Board Name
Key Function
NOTE The EG16 has two versions, that is, TN81EG16 and TN82EG16. The EX2 has two versions, that is, TN81EX2 and TN82EX2. The EFG4 can only be jointly used with the EG8. The SCA has two versions, that is, TN81SCA and TN82SCA. The XCS has three versions, that is, TN81XCS, TN82XCS, and TN83XCS.
4.3 Inter-Board Relation

Boards for the OptiX PTN 3900 are used together to provide various functions for the equipment. Figure 4-1 shows the inter-board relation of boards for the OptiX PTN 3900. Figure 4-1 Diagram of the inter-board relation of boards for the OptiX PTN 3900
UNI NNI
10GE
EX2
EX2
10GE
GE GE GE FE FE ATM STM-1
GE
EFG2 EFG4 ETFC EFF8 AFO1 EG16 /EG8 Switching plane EG16 /EG8
EFG2 EFG4 EFF8 POD41
GE GE FE STM-1/STM-4
E1
D12/D75
ATM STM-1
MD1/MQ1 MP1 AD1 MP1
MD1/MQ1 MP1
E1
D12/D75
Channelized STM-1
Channelized STM-1
CD1 MP1
Clock module
XCS
CD1 MP1
Service grooming Control and administration

-48 V/-60 V -48 V/-60 V
Power supply module (PIU)
Heat dissipation module (FAN)
Control and administration module (SCA)
NM interface Alarm input and output interface Alarm concatenation interface F&f
4-6
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
NOTE
4 Board Overview
On the UNI side, the equipment is connected to the customer edge to access user services to the packet switching network (PSN). On the NNI side, the equipment is connected to the PSN equipment to complete the transmission of user services in the PSN network. The EFG4 can only be jointly used with the EG8.
4.4 Board Running Environment

The equipment should be running in the qualified environment, and thus boards can run normally. Table 4-3 lists the requirements for the board running environment. Table 4-3 Requirements for the board running environment Running Period Long-time running Short-time running Ambient Temperature -5C to 55C Relative Humidity 5% to 85% 5% to 95%
NOTE
Short-time running: the continuous running period not more than 72 hours, and the accumulated running period of a year not more than 15 days.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
4-7
5 Processing Boards
5
About This Chapter
Processing Boards
For the OptiX PTN 3900, processing boards, such as the EG16, EG8, EX2, MP1, MD1, MQ1, CD1 and AD1,are available. 5.1 TN81EG16 This section describes the TN81EG16, a 16 x GE Ethernet processing board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 5.2 TN82EG16 This section describes the TN82EG16, a 16 x GE Ethernet processing board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 5.3 EG8 This section describes the EG8, an 8 x GE Ethernet processing board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, configuration reference, and technical specifications. 5.4 TN81EX2 This section describes the TN81EX2, a 2 x 10GE Ethernet processing board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications. 5.5 TN82EX2 This section describes the TN82EX2, a 2 x 10GE Ethernet processing board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, configuration reference, and technical specifications. 5.6 MP1 This section describes the MP1, a multi-protocol (TDM/IMA/ATM/ML-PPP) multi-interface (E1/STM-1) mother processing board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 5.7 MD1 This section describes the MD1, a 32 x E1 service sub-board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 5.8 MQ1
5 Processing Boards
This section describes the MQ1, a 63 x E1 service sub-board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 5.9 CD1 This section describes the CD1, a 2 x channelized STM-1 sub-board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 5.10 AD1 This section describes the AD1, a 2 x STM-1 ATM sub-board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications.
5-2
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
5.1 TN81EG16
This section describes the TN81EG16, a 16 x GE Ethernet processing board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 5.1.1 Version Description The function version of the TN81EG16 is TN81. 5.1.2 Functions and Features The TN81EG16 is used to process full-duplex 20 Gbit/s data and to forward data packets. The TN81EG16 supports quality of service (QoS) functions such as traffic management, congestion management and grooming. 5.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TN81EG16 mainly consists of the network processing module, transmission management module, switching buffer module, management module, power supply module and clock module. 5.1.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the TN81EG16, there are indicators, a laser safety class label and interfaces. 5.1.5 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN81EG16. On the U2000, the two slots are displayed as one with the smaller number. For example, slots 5 and 6 house the TN81EG16. On the U2000, only slot 5 is displayed. 5.1.6 Board Configuration Reference You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the TN81EG16. 5.1.7 Technical Specifications Specifications of the TN81EG16 cover specifications of interfaces, board dimensions, weight and power consumption.
5.1.1 Version Description

The function version of the TN81EG16 is TN81.
NOTE
The EG16 board has two function versions: TN81 and TN82. Certain hardware resources of the TN82EG16 board is reserved for enhanced functions of future versions. The TN82EG16 supports the board version replacement function. That is, the TN82EG16 can replace the TN81EG16. When a board with a later version is used with a board with an earlier version on one NE, if you query the board with a later version on the NMS, the logical version of the board with a later version is the same as that of the board with an earlier version.
5.1.2 Functions and Features

The TN81EG16 is used to process full-duplex 20 Gbit/s data and to forward data packets. The TN81EG16 supports quality of service (QoS) functions such as traffic management, congestion management and grooming. Table 5-1 lists functions and features of the TN81EG16.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-3
5 Processing Boards
Table 5-1 Functions and features of the TN81EG16 Function and Feature Basic function Usage Service interfaces on the front panel Processing capability 16 GE interfaces. Full-duplex 20 Gbit/s
Supports a maximum of 4 interface boards. Interface function Type of the loopback at the port PHY layer inloop and outloop MAC layer inloop Automatic releasing of the loopback at the port Configuration of the maximum transmission unit (MTU) for the ports Port bandwidth utilization statistics Supported Supported
Supported
Supports the inband DCN, which can be manually enabled and disabled. The DCN function is enabled for the first four ports by default. V-UNI interfaces allocation The OUT1 IN1 - OUT8 IN8 interfaces available can be configured in one V-UNI group. The OUT9 IN9 - OUT16 IN16 interfaces available can be configured in one V-UNI group. Automatic laser shutdown Traffic buffer time LAG Supported 50 ms Inter-board Intra-board Back pressure Number of supported E-Line Supported 4 k (used with the TN81SCA) 8 k (used with the TN82SCA) Number of VSI supported for ELAN Number of supported unidirectional static MPLS tunnels 1k 4 k (used with the TN81SCA) 16 k (used with the TN82SCA) Supported Supported
5-4
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Function and Feature Number of supported bidirectional static MPLS tunnels Total number of supported IP Tunnels and GRE Tunnels Number of supported PWs
Usage 2 k (used with the TN81SCA) 8 k (used with the TN82SCA) 256 (used with the TN81SCA) 1 k (used with the TN82SCA) 8 k (used with the TN81SCA) 16 k (used with the TN82SCA)
Number of supported MAC addresses Multicast
Dynamic MAC addresses Static MAC addresses Supported multicast groups Supported multicast members
131071 2k 4k 24 k
Number of supported QinQs
1 k (used with the TN81SCA) 4 k (used with the TN82SCA)
Number of supported APS protection groups Number of supported ACL MPLS tunnel OAM PW OAM PW APS BFD
1 k(shared by MPLS APS and PW APS) 8k Supported Supported Supports 1:1 PW APS with dual-ended switching. Supports BFD with a period of 3.3 ms, 10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, or 1s.
5.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The TN81EG16 mainly consists of the network processing module, transmission management module, switching buffer module, management module, power supply module and clock module. Figure 5-1 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the TN81EG16.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-5
5 Processing Boards
Figure 5-1 Block diagram for the working principle of the TN81EG16
Backplane
Service signals
Interface boards
Data processing module Packet forwarding module Network processing module
Service signal
Upstream transmission module Downstream transmission module Transmission management module
Service signal
Upstream transmission module Downstream transmission module Switching buffer module
Service signal
XCS
16 x GE
Parallel management bus
Management module
Ethernet communication bus Inter-board communication bus
SCA
Other boards
XCS XCS XCS
Interface boards Interface boards Interface boards
System clock IEEE 1588 V2 packets Synchronous Ethernet clocks Clock Module
System clocks IEEE 1588 V2 packets Synchronous Ethernet clocks
3.3 V . . . 0.75 V
. . .
-48 V/ -60 V
Power supply module
PIU PIU
-48 V/ -60 V
In the Transmit Direction

The switching buffer module processes the cells sent by the cross-connect unit and then sends the cells to the transmission management module. The transmission management module rearranges the cells to recover packets, for which the buffer and QoS management are performed. The packets are then sent to the network processing module. The network processing module converts the parallel signals to serial signals, which are then sent to the GE interface on the front panel, or to the corresponding interface board through the backplane.
In the Receive Direction

The network processing module accesses signals from the GE interface or interface board, decodes the signals and converts serial signals to parallel signals. The network processing module performs route searching or address matching to the data packets and then sends the packets to the transmission management module. The transmission management module buffers the packets and grooms the packets and then slices the packets into the cells required in a switching network. The switching buffer module buffers the cells and then sends the cells to the cross-connect unit.
Network Processing Module

This module mainly performs route searching and address matching for the data packets. The network processing module of the TN81EG16 can process full-duplex 20 Gbit/s or simplex 40 Gbit/s data packets.
5-6
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Transmission Management Module

The transmission management module slices packets into cells and performs the QoS, line rate forwarding and large-capacity buffer functions. The functions supported by this module are listed as follows: l QoS: This module provides functions of grooming services and restricting the bandwidth, which include the flow queue and port queue. In addition, this module provides the statistics information accordingly. Line rate forwarding: This module can bidirectionally transmit and receive packets at the full line rate, that is, 20 Gbit/s. Large volume buffer: This module supports 50-ms buffer in the upstream and downstream in the case of 20 Gbit/s traffic.
l l
Switching buffer Module

This module mainly performs buffer, queue management and grooming for cells. This module and the cross-connect unit form a three-level switching fabric to switch cells.
Management Module
The module provides buses, such as the parallel management bus and Ethernet communication bus, to manage other modules on the board, and the interface board. This module also monitors and reports alarms and performance events to the system control and communication unit.
Clock Module
This module performs the following functions: l l l Provides clock signals for each module of the board. Supports the transparent transmission of the IEEE 1588 V2 packets from the interface boards to the XCS. Works with the XCS to process the system clocks and the synchronous Ethernet clock signals accessed by the interface boards.
Power Supply Module

This module converts the input DC voltage into various DC voltages required by each module on the board.
5.1.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the TN81EG16, there are indicators, a laser safety class label and interfaces.
Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-2 shows the appearance of the front panel of the TN81EG16.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-7
5 Processing Boards
Figure 5-2 Appearance of the front panel of the TN81EG16
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the TN81EG16. l l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status ACT indicator, green, which indicates the service activation status PROG indicator, red or green, which indicates the running status of the program SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status
For details on indications of indicators, see A.2 Board Indicators.
5-8
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Laser Safety Class Label

The laser safety class is CLASS 1. For optical interfaces of this safety class, the maximum output optical power is less than 10 dBm (10 mW).
Interfaces
On the TN81EG16, 16 small form-factor pluggable (SFP) interfaces are present. Table 5-2 and Table 5-3 list the types and usage of the interfaces. For fiber corresponding to the interfaces, see 13.1.1 Types of Fiber. For cables corresponding to the interfaces, see 13.4.1 Straight Through Cable and 13.4.2 Crossover Cable. Table 5-2 Types and usage of the interfaces on the TN81EG16 Interface on the Front Panel Optical interfaces IN1 - IN16 Interface Type LC Usage When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input interface for the GE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is not used. OUT1 OUT16 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an output interface for the GE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input/output interface for the GE optical signal. Electrical interfaces OUT1 IN1OUT16 IN16 RJ-45 Input/Output interfaces for GE electrical signals For the pins for the GE electrical interface, see Table 5-3.
NOTE The SFP interface on the front panel can function as either an optical interface or an electrical interface. When the SFP interface functions as an optical interface, it need to be used with an optical module. l When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, two LC interfaces are provided on the left and right sides of the optical module. Each interface uses one fiber, which is used to transmit or receive service signals. l When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, only one LC interface is provided on the left side of the optical module. This optical interface uses only one fiber, which is used to transmit and receive service signals at the same time. When the SFP interface functions as an electrical interface, it need to be used with an electrical module.
Table 5-3 Pins for the GE electrical interface Front View Pin 1 2
87654321
Usage Positive of twisted pair cable 1 Negative of twisted pair cable 1 Positive of twisted pair cable 2 Positive of twisted pair cable 3
3 4
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-9
5 Processing Boards
Front View
Pin 5 6 7 8
Usage Negative of twisted pair cable 3 Negative of twisted pair cable 2 Positive of twisted pair cable 4 Negative of twisted pair cable 4
5.1.5 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN81EG16. On the U2000, the two slots are displayed as one with the smaller number. For example, slots 5 and 6 house the TN81EG16. On the U2000, only slot 5 is displayed. The interface boards for the TN81EG16 are POD41, ETFC, EFF8, AFO1, and EFG2. Table 5-4 lists the relation between slots for the TN81EG16 and slots for the interface board. Table 5-4 Relation between slots for the TN81EG16 and slots for the interface board Slots for the TN81EG16 slots 1 slots 3 slots 5 Slots for the Interface Board slots 19, 20, 21, 22 slots 23, 24, 25, 26 Remarks Slot 1 actually represents slot 1 and slot 2. Slot 3 actually represents slot 3 and slot 4. Slot 5 actually represents slot 5 and slot 6. The two slots have interfaces on the front panel and are not used with interface boards. slots 7 Slot 7 actually represents slot 7 and slot 8. The two slots have interfaces on the front panel and are not used with interface boards. slots 11 Slot 11 actually represents slot 11 and slot 12. The two slots have interfaces on the front panel and are not used with interface boards.
5-10
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Slots for the TN81EG16 slots 13
Slots for the Interface Board -
Remarks Slot 13 actually represents slot 13 and slot 14. The two slots have interfaces on the front panel and are not used with interface boards.
slots 15 slots 17
slots 31, 32, 33, 34 slots 35, 36, 37, 38
Slot 15 actually represents slot 15 and slot 16. Slot 17 actually represents slot 17 and slot 18.
5.1.6 Board Configuration Reference

You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the TN81EG16. You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the TN81EG16. l l Ethernet Interface Automatic Laser Shutdown
For details on the parameters, see D Board Configuration Parameters.
5.1.7 Technical Specifications

Specifications of the TN81EG16 cover specifications of interfaces, board dimensions, weight and power consumption. Table 5-5 lists the specifications of optical interfaces on the TN81EG16. Table 5-8 lists the specifications of electrical interfaces on the TN81EG16. Table 5-5 Technical specifications of the GE optical interface Item Optical interface type Specification Two-fiber bidirectional interface Single-fiber bidirectional interface 1000BASEZX (80 km) Single-mode 1000BASECWDM (80 km) Single-mode 1000BASEBX (10 km) Single-mode
1000BASESX (0.5 km) Fiber type Multi-mode
1000BASELX (10 km) Single-mode
1000BASEVX (40 km) Single-mode
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-11
5 Processing Boards
Item Working wavelength range (nm)
Specification 770 to 860 1270 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1500 to 1580 For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of 1000BASECWDM optical interfaces and wavelength allocation. 0 to 5 For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of 1000BASEBX optical interfaces and wavelength allocation. -9 to -3
Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Optical module part number
-9.5 to 0
-11 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to 5
-17
-19
-22
-22
-28
-19.5
-3
-3
-3
-9
-3
8.2
34060286
34060473
34060298
34060360
For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of 1000BASECWDM optical interfaces and wavelength allocation.
For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of 1000BASEBX optical interfaces and wavelength allocation.
NOTE For details of the optical module, see 11.2 Optical Module Labels.
5-12
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Table 5-6 Related optical module part numbers of 1000BASE-CWDM optical interfaces and related optical module wavelength allocation SN Optical module part number 34060483 34060481 34060479 34060482 Wavelength (nm) SN Optical module part number 34060478 34060476 34060477 34060480 Wavelength (nm)
1 2 3 4
1464.5 to 1477.5 1484.5 to 1497.5 1504.5 to 1517.5 1524.5 to 1537.5
5 6 7 8
1544.5 to 1557.5 1564.5 to 1577.5 1584.5 to 1597.5 1604.5 to 1617.5
Table 5-7 Related optical module part numbers of 1000BASE-BX optical interfaces and wavelength allocation Item Optical part number Transmitter wavelength (nm) Receiver wavelength (nm) Local 34060470 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500 Remote 34060475 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360
Table 5-8 Technical Specifications of the GE Electrical Interface Item Electrical interface rate RJ-45 electrical interface specification Specification 1000 Mbit/s Compliant with the IEEE 802.3
Board dimensions (mm): 261.4 (H) x 266.8 (D) x 50.8 (W) Weight (kg): 2.40 Power consumption (W): 152.2
5.2 TN82EG16
This section describes the TN82EG16, a 16 x GE Ethernet processing board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 5.2.1 Version Description The function version of the TN82EG16 is TN82. 5.2.2 Functions and Features
5 Processing Boards
The TN82EG16 is used to process full-duplex 20 Gbit/s data and to forward data packets. The TN82EG16 supports quality of service (QoS) functions such as traffic management, congestion management and grooming. 5.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TN82EG16 mainly consists of the network processing module, transmission management module, switching buffer module, management module, power supply module and clock module. 5.2.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the TN82EG16, there are indicators, a laser safety class label and interfaces. 5.2.5 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN82EG16. On the U2000, the two slots are displayed as one with the smaller number. For example, slots 5 and 6 house the TN82EG16. On the U2000, only slot 5 is displayed. 5.2.6 Board Configuration Reference You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the TN82EG16. 5.2.7 Technical Specifications Specifications of the TN82EG16 cover specifications of interfaces, board dimensions, weight and power consumption.

The function version of the TN82EG16 is TN82.
NOTE
The EG16 board has two function versions: TN81 and TN82. Certain hardware resources of the TN82EG16 board is reserved for enhanced functions of future versions.The TN82EG16 supports the board version replacement function. That is, the TN82EG16 can replace the TN81EG16. When a board with a later version is used with a board with an earlier version on one NE, if you query the board with a later version on the NMS, the logical version of the board with a later version is the same as that of the board with an earlier version.

The TN82EG16 is used to process full-duplex 20 Gbit/s data and to forward data packets. The TN82EG16 supports quality of service (QoS) functions such as traffic management, congestion management and grooming. Table 5-9 lists functions and features of the TN82EG16. Table 5-9 Functions and features of the TN82EG16 Function and Feature Basic function Usage Service interfaces on the front panel Processing capability 16 GE interfaces Full-duplex 20 Gbit/s
Supports a maximum of 4 interface boards.
5-14
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Function and Feature Interface function
Usage Type of the loopback at the port PHY layer inloop and outloop MAC layer inloop Automatic releasing of the loopback at the port Configuration of the maximum transmission unit (MTU) for the ports Port bandwidth utilization statistics Supported Supported
Supported
Supports the inband DCN, which can be manually enabled and disabled. The DCN function is enabled for the first four ports by default. V-UNI interfaces allocation The OUT1 IN1 - OUT8 IN8 interfaces available can be configured in one V-UNI group. The OUT9 IN9 - OUT9 IN9 interfaces available can be configured in one V-UNI group. Automatic laser shutdown Traffic buffer time LAG Supported 50 ms Inter-board Intra-board Back pressure Number of supported E-Line Supported 4 k (used with the TN81SCA) 8 k (used with the TN82SCA) Number of VSI supported for ELAN Number of supported unidirectional static MPLS tunnels Number of supported bidirectional static MPLS tunnels Total number of supported IP Tunnels and GRE Tunnels 1k 4 k (used with the TN81SCA) 16 k (used with the TN82SCA) 2 k (used with the TN81SCA) 8 k (used with the TN82SCA) 256 (used with the TN81SCA) 1 k (used with the TN82SCA) Supported Supported
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-15
5 Processing Boards
Function and Feature Number of supported PWs
Usage 8 k (used with the TN81SCA) 16 k (used with the TN82SCA)
131071 2k 4k 24 k
Number of supported APS protection groups Number of supported ACL MPLS tunnel OAM PW OAM PW APS BFD
1 k (shared by MPLS APS and PW APS) 8k Supported Supported Supports 1:1 PW APS with dual-ended switching. Supports BFD with a period of 3.3 ms, 10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, or 1s.

The TN82EG16 mainly consists of the network processing module, transmission management module, switching buffer module, management module, power supply module and clock module. Figure 5-3 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the TN82EG16.
5-16
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Figure 5-3 Block diagram for the working principle of the TN82EG16
Backplane
Service signals
Interface boards
Data processing module Packet forwarding module Network processing module
Service signal
Service signal
Service signal
XCS
16 x GE
Management module
SCA
Other boards
XCS XCS XCS
Interface boards Interface boards Interface boards
System clock IEEE 1588 V2 packets Synchronous Ethernet clocks Clock Module
System clocks IEEE 1588 V2 packets Synchronous Ethernet clocks
3.3 V . . . 0.75 V
. . .
-48 V/ -60 V
Power supply module
PIU PIU
-48 V/ -60 V

The switching buffer module processes the cells sent by the cross-connect unit and then sends the cells to the transmission management module. The transmission management module rearranges the cells to recover packets, for which the buffer and QoS management are performed. The packets are then sent to the network processing module. The network processing module converts the parallel signals to serial signals, which are then sent to the GE interface on the front panel, or to the corresponding interface board through the backplane.

The network processing module accesses signals from the GE interface or interface board, decodes the signals and converts serial signals to parallel signals. The network processing module performs route searching or address matching to the data packets and then sends the packets to the transmission management module. The transmission management module buffers the packets and grooms the packets and then slices the packets into the cells required in a switching network. The switching buffer module buffers the cells and then sends the cells to the cross-connect unit.

This module mainly performs route searching and address matching for the data packets. The network processing module of the TN82EG16 can process full-duplex 20 Gbit/s or simplex 40 Gbit/s data packets.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-17
5 Processing Boards

The transmission management module slices packets into cells and performs the QoS, line rate forwarding and large-capacity buffer functions. The functions supported by this module are listed as follows: l QoS: This module provides functions of grooming services and restricting the bandwidth, which include the flow queue and port queue. In addition, this module provides the statistics information accordingly. Line rate forwarding: This module can bidirectionally transmit and receive packets at the full line rate, that is, 20 Gbit/s. Large volume buffer: This module supports 50-ms buffer in the upstream and downstream in the case of 20 Gbit/s traffic.
l l
Switching buffer Module

This module mainly performs buffer, queue management and grooming for cells. This module and the cross-connect unit form a three-level switching fabric to switch cells.
Management Module
The module provides buses, such as the parallel management bus and Ethernet communication bus, to manage other modules on the board, and the interface board. This module also monitors and reports alarms and performance events to the system control and communication unit.
Clock Module
The functions supported by the clock module are listed as follows: l l l Provides clock signals for each module of the board. Supports the transparent transmission of the IEEE 1588 V2 packets from the interface boards to the XCS. Works with the XCS to process the system clocks and the synchronous Ethernet clock signals accessed by the interface boards.
Power Supply Module

5.2.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the TN82EG16, there are indicators, a laser safety class label and interfaces.

Figure 5-4 shows the appearance of the front panel of the TN82EG16.
5-18
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Figure 5-4 Appearance of the front panel of the TN82EG16
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the TN82EG16. l l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status ACT indicator, green, which indicates the service activation status PROG indicator, red or green, which indicates the running status of the program SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-19
5 Processing Boards

Interfaces
On the TN82EG16, 16 SFP interfaces are present. Table 5-10 and Table 5-11 list the types and usage of the interfaces. For fiber corresponding to the interfaces, see 13.1.1 Types of Fiber. For cables corresponding to the interfaces, see 13.4.1 Straight Through Cable and 13.4.2 Crossover Cable. Table 5-10 Types and usage of the interfaces on the TN82EG16 Interface on the Front Panel Optical interfaces IN1 - IN16 Interface Type LC Usage When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input interface for the GE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is not used. OUT1 OUT16 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an output interface for the GE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input/output interface for the GE optical signal. Electrical interfaces OUT1 IN1OUT16 IN16 RJ-45 Input/Output interfaces for GE electrical signals For the pins for the GE electrical interface, see Table 5-11.
5-20
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
87654321
Usage Positive of twisted pair cable 1 Negative of twisted pair cable 1 Positive of twisted pair cable 2 Positive of twisted pair cable 3 Negative of twisted pair cable 3 Negative of twisted pair cable 2 Positive of twisted pair cable 4 Negative of twisted pair cable 4
3 4 5 6 7 8
5.2.5 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN82EG16. On the U2000, the two slots are displayed as one with the smaller number. For example, slots 5 and 6 house the TN82EG16. On the U2000, only slot 5 is displayed. The interface boards for the TN82EG16 are POD41, AFO1, ETFC, EFF8, and EFG2. Table 5-12 lists the relation between slots for the TN82EG16 and slots for the interface board. Table 5-12 Relation between slots for the TN82EG16 and slots for the interface board Slots for the TN82EG16 slots 1 slots 3 slots 5 Slots for the Interface Board slots 19, 20, 21, 22 slots 23, 24, 25, 26 Remarks Slot 1 actually represents slot 1 and slot 2. Slot 3 actually represents slot 3 and slot 4. Slot 5 actually represents slot 5 and slot 6. The two slots have interfaces on the front panel and are not used with interface boards. slots 7 Slot 7 actually represents slot 7 and slot 8. The two slots have interfaces on the front panel and are not used with interface boards.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-21
5 Processing Boards
Slots for the TN82EG16 slots 11
Slots for the Interface Board -
Remarks Slot 11 actually represents slot 11 and slot 12. The two slots have interfaces on the front panel and are not used with interface boards.
slots 13
Slot 13 actually represents slot 13 and slot 14. The two slots have interfaces on the front panel and are not used with interface boards.
slots 15 slots 17
slots 31, 32, 33, 34 slots 35, 36, 37, 38
Slot 15 actually represents slot 15 and slot 16. Slot 17 actually represents slot 17 and slot 18.

You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the TN82EG16. You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the TN82EG16. l l Ethernet Interface Automatic Laser Shutdown

Specifications of the TN82EG16 cover specifications of interfaces, board dimensions, weight and power consumption. Table 5-13 lists the specifications of optical interfaces on the TN82EG16. Table 5-16 lists the specifications of electrical interfaces on the TN82EG16. Table 5-13 Technical specifications of the GE optical interface Item Optical interface type Specification Two-fiber bidirectional interface Single-fiber bidirectional interface 1000BASEZX (80 km) 1000BASECWDM (80 km) 1000BASEBX (10 km)
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
1000BASESX (0.5 km)

5-22
1000BASELX (10 km)
1000BASEVX (40 km)
5 Processing Boards
Item Fiber type Working wavelength range (nm)
Specification Multi-mode 770 to 860 Single-mode 1270 to 1360 Single-mode 1260 to 1360 Single-mode 1500 to 1580 Single-mode For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of 1000BASECWDM optical interfaces and wavelength allocation. 0 to 5 Single-mode For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of 1000BASEBX optical interfaces and wavelength allocation. -9 to -3
-9.5 to 0
-11 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to 5
-17
-19
-22
-22
-28
-19.5
-3
-3
-3
-9
-3
8.2
34060286
34060473
34060298
34060360
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-23
5 Processing Boards
1 2 3 4
1464.5 to 1477.5 1484.5 to 1497.5 1504.5 to 1517.5 1524.5 to 1537.5
5 6 7 8
1544.5 to 1557.5 1564.5 to 1577.5 1584.5 to 1597.5 1604.5 to 1617.5
5.3 EG8
This section describes the EG8, an 8 x GE Ethernet processing board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, configuration reference, and technical specifications. 5.3.1 Version Description The function version of the EG8 is TN81. 5.3.2 Functions and Features
5 Processing Boards
The EG8 accesses 8 x GE signals and forwards 20 Gbit/s data. The EG8 supports the QoS functions such as traffic management, congestion control, and scheduling. 5.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The EG8 mainly consists of the service processing module, transmission management module, switching buffer module, management module, clock module, and power supply module. 5.3.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the EG8, there are indicators and interfaces. 5.3.5 Valid Slots The EG8 can be housed in any of slots 1-8 and 11-18 of the subrack. 5.3.6 Board Configuration Reference You can use the U2000 to set parameters for the EG8. 5.3.7 Technical Specifications Specifications of the EG8 cover specifications of interfaces, board dimensions, weight and power consumption.

The function version of the EG8 is TN81.

The EG8 accesses 8 x GE signals and forwards 20 Gbit/s data. The EG8 supports the QoS functions such as traffic management, congestion control, and scheduling. Table 5-17 lists the functions and features of the EG8. Table 5-17 Functions and features of the EG8 Function and Feature Basic functions Remarks Service interfaces on the front panel Service processing capability Eight GE interfaces 20 Gbit/s in full-duplex
A maximum of two interface boards are supported. Interface function Type of the loopback at the port Automatic loopback release at the port Port MTU Port bandwidth utilization statistics MAC-layer inloop and outloop Supported Supported Supported
The inband DCN function is supported, and the DCN function can be automatically enabled or disabled. By default, the former four ports are enabled with the DCN function.
5 Processing Boards
Function and Feature Automatic laser shutdown Traffic buffer time Link aggregation group (LAG) Back pressure Number of supported E-Line services Number of VSIs that support E-LAN services Number of supported unidirectional static MPLS tunnels Number of supported bidirectional static MPLS tunnels Number of supported PWs
Remarks Supported 17 ms Intra-board LAG Inter-board LAG Supported 4 k (when used with the TN81SCA) 8 k (when used with the TN82SCA) 1k 4 k (when used with the TN81SCA) 16 k (when used with the TN82SCA) 2 k (used with the TN81SCA) 8 k (used with the TN82SCA) 8 k (when used with the TN81SCA) 16 k (when used with the TN82SCA) Supported Supported
Dynamic MAC address Static MAC address Number of supported multicast groups Number of supported multicast group members in each multicast group
131071 2k 4k 24 k
Number of supported QinQ links Number of APS protection groups Number of ACLs MPLS tunnel OAM PW OAM PW APS Clock
1 k (when used with the TN81SCA) 4 k (when used with the TN82SCA) 1 k (shared by MPLS APS and PW APS) 4k Supported Supported Supports 1:1 PW APS with dual-ended switching. Synchronous Ethernet Supported
5-26
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Function and Feature
Remarks Transmitting and receiving of SSMs at a synchronous Ethernet interface IEEE 1588V2 protocol IEEE 1588V2 ACR clock Supported
Supported Supported
NOTE The GE interface on the front panel can function as either an optical interface or an electrical interface. When the GE interface functions as an electrical interface, it only supports the 1000 Mbit/s full- duplex working mode. The remote interface should also be set to 1000 Mbit/s full- duplex working mode.

The EG8 mainly consists of the service processing module, transmission management module, switching buffer module, management module, clock module, and power supply module. Figure 5-5 shows the block diagram for the functions of the EG8. Figure 5-5 Block diagram for the functions of the EG8
Backplane
Service signals
Service signal
Interface boards
Service forwarding module GE Service access module Service processing module
Service signal
Service signal
Service signal
XCS
Management bus
Management bus
Management bus
Management module
SCA
Other boards
Synchronous Ethernet clock IEEE 1588V2 packets Clock Module
Synchronous Ethernet clock IEEE 1588V2 packets System clocks
XCS XCS XCS
0.9 V . . . 3.3 V
. . .
-48 V/ -60 V
Power supply module
PIU PIU
-48 V/ -60 V
Transmit Direction
The switching buffer module processes cells from the cross-connect unit and then sends the cells to the transmission management module. The transmission management module rearranges the
5 Processing Boards
cells to packets, for which buffer and QoS management are performed. The packets are then sent to the service processing module for data encoding/decoding and parallel/serial conversion, and then the packets are sent to the GE interface or to the corresponding interface board through the backplane.
Receive Direction
The service processing module performs O/E conversion for the Ethernet signals from a port on the Ethernet equipment, or accesses service signals from the interface board. Then, the service processing module performs encoding/decoding and serial/parallel conversion for the data, performs route search or address matching for data packets, extracts protocol packets, and sends corresponding packets to the transmission management module. After buffering and scheduling the packets, the transmission management module slices the packets into cells required by the switching network. After the switching network buffer module buffers the cells, the cells are then sent to the cross-connect unit.
Service Processing Module

The service processing module performs the following functions: l In the receive direction, the service processing module receives GE signals through the interface on the front panel and then the service access module performs encoding/decoding and serial/parallel conversion for signals. The processed service signals and the service signals transmitted from the interface board are transmitted to the service forwarding module, thus implementing route search and address matching for data packets. In the transmit direction, the service processing module receives signals from the transmission management module. After the encoding/decoding and serial/parallel conversion by the service access module, signals are transmitted through the interface on the front panel or forwarded by the service forwarding module to the matching interface board. The service processing module extracts protocol packets. The service processing module extracts synchronous Ethernet clock signals. The service processing module extracts IEEE 1588V2 packets.
l l l

The transmission management module slices packets into cells of a fixed length, and performs QoS and large-volume buffer. The functions supported by this module are listed as follows: l l QoS: QoS involves scheduling of flow queues and port queues, bandwidth restriction, and provision of related statistical information. Large-volume buffer: 17 ms buffer in the upstream and downstream in the case of 20 Gbit/ s traffic is supported.
Switching Buffer Module

The switching buffer module mainly buffers cells to the cross-connect board.
Management Module
The management module provides the management bus and communication bus, and manages each module on the board. In addition, this module reports the alarm and performance monitoring information to the SCA.
5 Processing Boards
Clock Module
The clock module performs the following functions: l l l l Provides a clock for each module on the board. Supports synchronous Ethernet. Supports the IEEE 1588V2 protocol. Supports the IEEE 1588V2 ACR clock.
Power Supply Module

The power supply module converts the accessed DC voltage into various DC voltages required by each module on the board.
5.3.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the EG8, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 5-6 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EG8.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-29
5 Processing Boards
Figure 5-6 Appearance of the front panel of the EG8
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the EG8. l l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status ACT indicator, green, which indicates the service activation status PROG indicator, red or green, which indicates the running status of the program SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status
5-30
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Interfaces
On the EG8, eight SFP interfaces are present. Table 5-18 and Table 5-19 lists types and usage of the interfaces. For details on the fibers and cables corresponding to the interfaces, see 13.1.1 Types of Fiber, 13.4.1 Straight Through Cable and 13.4.2 Crossover Cable. Table 5-18 Types and usage of the GE interfaces on the EG8 Interface on the Front Panel Optical interfaces IN1-IN8 Interface Type LC Usage When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input interface for the GE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is not used. OUT1OUT8 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an output interface for the GE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input/output interface for the GE optical signal. Electrical interfaces OUT1 IN1OUT8 IN8 RJ-45 Input/Output interfaces for GE electrical signals For the pins for the GE electrical interface, see Table 5-19.
87654321
3 4 5 6 7 8
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-31
5 Processing Boards
5.3.5 Valid Slots

The EG8 can be housed in any of slots 1-8 and 11-18 of the subrack. Table 5-20 lists the mapping relation between the slots for the EG8 and the slots for the corresponding interface board. Table 5-20 Mapping relation between the slots for the EG8 and the slots for the corresponding interface board Slot for the EG8 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slots 5-8 Slots 11-14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17 Slot 18 Slot for the Corresponding Interface Board Slots 19-20 Slots 21-22 Slots 23-24 Slots 25-26 Slots 31-32 Slots 33-34 Slots 35-36 Slots 37-38

You can use the U2000 to set parameters for the EG8. You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the EG8. l l Ethernet interfaces Automatic laser shutdown

Specifications of the EG8 cover specifications of interfaces, board dimensions, weight and power consumption. Table 5-21 lists the specifications of optical interfaces on the EG8, and Table 5-24 lists the specifications of electrical interfaces.
5-32
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Table 5-21 Technical specifications of the GE optical interface Item Optical interface type Specification Two-fiber bidirectional interface Single-fiber bidirectional interface 1000BASEZX (80 km) Single-mode 1500 to 1580 1000BASECWDM (80 km) Single-mode For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of 1000BASECWDM optical interfaces and wavelength allocation. 0 to 5 1000BASEBX (10 km) Single-mode For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of 1000BASEBX optical interfaces and wavelength allocation. -9 to -3
1000BASESX (0.5 km) Fiber type Working wavelength range (nm) Multi-mode 770 to 860
1000BASELX (10 km) Single-mode 1270 to 1360
1000BASEVX (40 km) Single-mode 1260 to 1360
-9.5 to 0
-11 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to 5
-17
-19
-22
-22
-28
-19.5
-3
-3
-3
-9
-3
8.2
34060286
34060473
34060298
34060360
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-33
5 Processing Boards
Item
Specification
1 2 3 4
1464.5 to 1477.5 1484.5 to 1497.5 1504.5 to 1517.5 1524.5 to 1537.5
5 6 7 8
1544.5 to 1557.5 1564.5 to 1577.5 1584.5 to 1597.5 1604.5 to 1617.5
5-34
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
5.4 TN81EX2
This section describes the TN81EX2, a 2 x 10GE Ethernet processing board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications. 5.4.1 Version Description The function version of the TN81EX2 is TN81. 5.4.2 Functions and Features The TN81EX2 supports two 10G optical interfaces, and uses the LC optical fiber connector. It forwards data packets. For the data packets, the TN81EX2 supports QoS functions such as traffic management, congestion control, and queue scheduling. 5.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TN81EX2 mainly consists of the network management module, transmission management module, switching buffer module, management module, power supply module, and clock module. 5.4.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the TN81EX2, there are indicators, a laser safety class label, and interfaces. 5.4.5 Valid Slots Two slots house one TN81EX2. On the U2000, the two slots are displayed as the one with the smaller number. For example, slots 3 and 4 house the TN81EX2. On the U2000, only slot 3 is displayed. 5.4.6 Board Configuration Reference You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the TN81EX2. 5.4.7 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the TN81EX2 cover the interface specifications, board dimensions, weight and power consumption.

The function version of the TN81EX2 is TN81.
NOTE
Two function versions of the EX2 are available, that is, TN81 and TN82. The differences between the two versions are as follows: l The TN81EX2 occupies two slots, but the TN82EX2 occupies one slot. l The interfaces on the TN81EX2 support the WAN mode. l The interfaces on the TN81EX2 support the PHY-layer loopback. l The TN81EX2 can be used on the network side of a dual-homing node, and it supports IP/GRE tunnels, BFD function, and service mirror function. l Compared with the TN81EX2, the TN82EX2 supports less protection type combinations. For details, see the OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Feature Description.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-35
5 Processing Boards

The TN81EX2 supports two 10G optical interfaces, and uses the LC optical fiber connector. It forwards data packets. For the data packets, the TN81EX2 supports QoS functions such as traffic management, congestion control, and queue scheduling. Table 5-25 lists the functions and features of the TN81EX2. Table 5-25 Functions and features of the TN81EX2 Function and Feature Basic function Description Service interfaces on the front panel Processing capability Interface function Type of the loopback at the port Two 10GE interfaces. Full-duplex 20 Gbit/s PHY layer inloop and outloop MAC layer inloop Automatic releasing of the loopback at the port Configuration of the maximum transmission unit (MTU) for the ports Port bandwidth utilization statistics Supported. Supported.
Supported.
Supports the inband DCN. The DCN function is enabled for the two ports by default, and can be manually enabled and disabled. Automatic laser shutdown Traffic buffer time LAG Supported. 50 ms Inter-board Intra-board Back pressure Number of supported E-Line Supported. 4 k (used with the TN81SCA) 8 k (used with the TN82SCA) Number of VSI supported for ELAN Number of supported unidirectional static MPLS Tunnels 1k 4 k (used with the TN81SCA) 16 k (used with the TN82SCA) Supported. Supported.
5-36
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Function and Feature Number of supported bidirectional static MPLS tunnels Total number of supported IP Tunnels and GRE Tunnels Number of supported PWs
Description 2 k (used with the TN81SCA) 8 k (used with the TN82SCA) 256 (used with the TN81SCA) 1 k (used with the TN82SCA) 8 k (used with the TN81SCA) 16 k (used with the TN82SCA)
131071 2k 4k 24 k
Number of supported APS protection groups Number of supported ACL MPLS tunnel OAM PW OAM PW APS BFD Clock
1 k (shared by MPLS APS and PW APS) 8k Supported Supported Supports 1:1 PW APS with dual-ended switching. Supports BFD with a period of 3.3 ms, 10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, or 1s. Synchronous Ethernet IEEE 1588 V2 protocol 1588 ACR clock Transmitting and receiving the synchronous status message (SSM) of synchronous Ethernet ports. Supported. Supported. Supported.

The TN81EX2 mainly consists of the network management module, transmission management module, switching buffer module, management module, power supply module, and clock module. Figure 5-7 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the TN81EX2.
5 Processing Boards
Figure 5-7 Block diagram for the working principle of the EX2
Backplane
Data processing module 2 x 10 GE Packet forwarding module
Service signal
Upstream transmission module Downstream transmission module
Service signal
Upstream scheduling module Downstream scheduling module
Service signal
XCS
Network processing module
Transmission management module
Switching buffer module

Parallel management bus SCA Other boards XCS XCS XCS
Ethernet communication bus Management module Inter-board communication bus
IEEE 1588 V2 packets Synchronous Ethernet clock Clock Module
System clocks IEEE 1588 V2 packets Synchronous Ethernet clock
0.75 V . . . 5.0 V
. . .
-48V/-60V Power supply module -48V/-60V
PIU PIU

The cross-connect buffer module processes the cells sent by the cross-connect unit and then sends the cells to the transmission management module. The transmission management module rearranges the cells to recover packets, for which the buffer and QoS management are performed. The packets are then sent to the network processing module. The network processing module performs the coding/decoding and the serial/parallel conversion for the data, and then sends the data to the 10 GE optical interface.

The network processing module performs the O/E conversion for the Ethernet optical signals from the port of the Ethernet equipment, and performs the coding/decoding and the serial/parallel conversion for the data. The network processing module also performs route searching and address matching for the data packets, and transmits the corresponding packets to the transmission management module. After the transmission management module buffers and schedules the packets, the transmission management module slices the packets into cells required by the switching network. After the switching buffer module buffers the cells, the cells are then sent to the cross-connect unit.

The functions supported by this module are listed as follows: l In the receive direction, performs the O/E conversion for the 10GE Ethernet optical signals from the port of the Ethernet equipment (switch or router), and performs the coding/ decoding.In the transmit direction, perform the coding and parallel/serial conversion on the signals from the transmission management module, and then perform the O/E conversion and transmit the signals.
5-38
5 Processing Boards
l l l
Performs route searching and address matching for the data packet. Extracts the synchronous Ethernet clock signals. Extracts the IEEE 1588 V2 packets.

This module slices packets into cells, and performs the QoS, line rate forwarding, and large volume buffer functions. The functions supported by this module are listed as follows: l QoS: This module provides functions of scheduling services and restricting the bandwidth, which include the flow queues and port queues. In addition, this module provides the statistics information accordingly. Line rate forwarding: This module can bi-directionally transmit and receive packets at the full line rate, that is, 20 Gbit/s. Large volume buffer: This module supports 50-ms buffer in the upstream and downstream in the case of 20 Gbit/s traffic.
l l

This module mainly performs buffer, queue management, and scheduling for cells. This module and the cross-connect unit form a three-level switching fabric to switch cells.
Management Module
This module provides buses, such as the parallel management bus and Ethernet communication bus, to manage other modules on the board. This module also monitors and reports alarms and performance events to the system control unit.
Clock Module
The functions supported by this module are listed as follows: l l l l Provides clock signals for each module of the board. Supports the synchronous Ethernet. Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 protocol. Supports the 1588 ACR clock.
Power Supply Module

5.4.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the TN81EX2, there are indicators, a laser safety class label, and interfaces.

Figure 5-8 shows the appearance of the front panel of the TN81EX2.
5 Processing Boards
Figure 5-8 Appearance of the front panel of the TN81EX2
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the TN81EX2. l l l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status ACT indicator, green, which indicates the service activation status PROG indicator, red or green, which indicates the running status of the program SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status L/A1 and L/A2 indicators, green or orange, which indicate the receiving, transmitting, and connection states of the data.

Interfaces
Two SFP interfaces, which slope downwards 35 degrees, are present on the TN81EX2. Table 5-26 lists the types and usage of the interfaces. For fiber corresponding to the interfaces, see 13.1.1 Types of Fiber.
5-40
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Table 5-26 Types and usage of the interfaces on the TN81EX2 Interface on the Front Panel IN1 - IN2 OUT1 - OUT2 Interface Type LC LC Usage Receive 10GE optical signals. Transmit 10GE optical signals.
NOTE The SFP interface should be used with an optical module. Two LC interfaces are provided on the left and right sides of the optical module. Each interface uses one fiber, which is used to transmit or receive service signals.
5.4.5 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN81EX2. On the U2000, the two slots are displayed as the one with the smaller number. For example, slots 3 and 4 house the TN81EX2. On the U2000, only slot 3 is displayed. Table 5-27 lists the valid slots for the TN81EX2. Table 5-27 Valid slots for the TN81EX2 Slots for the TN81EX2 Slots 1 Remarks Slot 1 actually represents slot 1 and slot 2. The board housed in these two slots provides interfaces on the front panel. Slot 3 actually represents slot 3 and slot 4. The board housed in these two slots provides interfaces on the front panel. Slot 5 actually represents slot 5 and slot 6. The board housed in these two slots provides interfaces on the front panel. Slot 7 actually represents slot 7 and slot 8. The board housed in these two slots provides interfaces on the front panel. Slot 11 actually represents slot 11 and slot 12. The board housed in these two slots provides interfaces on the front panel. Slot 13 actually represents slot 13 and slot 14. The board housed in these two slots provides interfaces on the front panel. Slot 15 actually represents slot 15 and slot 16. The board housed in these two slots provides interfaces on the front panel.
Slots 3
Slots 5
Slots 7
Slots 11
Sots 13
Slots 15
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-41
5 Processing Boards
Slots for the TN81EX2 Sots 17
Remarks Slot 17 actually represents slot 17 and slot 18. The board housed in these two slots provides interfaces on the front panel.

You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the TN81EX2. You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the TN81EX2. l l l l l Ethernet interface Automatic Laser Shutdown J0 (it can be configured when the interface is in the WAN mode) J1 (it can be configured when the interface is in the WAN mode) C2 (it can be configured when the interface is in the WAN mode)

The technical specifications of the TN81EX2 cover the interface specifications, board dimensions, weight and power consumption. Table 5-28 lists the specifications of interfaces on the TN81EX2. Table 5-28 Technical specifications of the 10GE optical interface Item Optical interface type Specification Two-fiber bidirectional interface 10GBASE-S (0.3 km) Fiber type Working wavelength range (nm) Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm)
5-42
10GBASE-L (10 km) Single-mode 1260 to 1355
10GBASE-E (40 km) Single-mode 1530 to 1565
10GBASE-Z (80 km) Single-mode 1530 to 1565
Multi-mode 840 to 860
-7.3 to -1
-8.2 to 0.5
-4.7 to 4
0 to 4
-11.1 -1
-12.6 0.5
-14.1 -1
-21 -7
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Item Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Optical module part number
Specification 3 3.5 3 3
34060362
34060313
34060322
34060361
Board dimensions (mm): 261.4 (H) x 266.8 (D) x 50.8 (W) Board weight (kg): 2.08 Power consumption (W): 163.9
5.5 TN82EX2
This section describes the TN82EX2, a 2 x 10GE Ethernet processing board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, configuration reference, and technical specifications. 5.5.1 Version Description The function version of the TN82EX2 is TN82. 5.5.2 Functions and Features The TN82EX2 accesses 2 x 10GE signals and forwards 20 Gbit/s data. The TN82EX2 supports QoS functions such as traffic management, congestion control, and scheduling. 5.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TN82EX2 mainly consists of the service processing module, transmission management module, switching buffer module, management module, clock module, and power supply module. 5.5.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the TN82EX2, there are indicators and interfaces. 5.5.5 Valid Slots The TN82EX2 can be housed in any of slots 1-8 and 11-18 of the subrack. 5.5.6 Board Configuration Reference You can use the U2000 to set parameters for the TN82EX2. 5.5.7 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the TN82EX2 cover the interface specifications, board dimensions, weight and power consumption.

The function version of the TN82EX2 is TN82.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-43
5 Processing Boards
NOTE
Two function versions of the EX2 are available, that is, TN81 and TN82. The differences between the two versions are as follows: l The TN81EX2 occupies two slots, but the TN82EX2 occupies one slot. l The interfaces on the TN81EX2 support the WAN mode. l The interfaces on the TN81EX2 support the PHY-layer loopback. l The TN81EX2 can be used on the network side of a dual-homing node, and it supports IP/GRE tunnels, BFD function, and service mirror function. l Compared with the TN81EX2, the TN82EX2 supports less protection type combinations. For details, see the OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series Feature Description.

The TN82EX2 accesses 2 x 10GE signals and forwards 20 Gbit/s data. The TN82EX2 supports QoS functions such as traffic management, congestion control, and scheduling. Table 5-29 lists functions and features of the TN82EX2. Table 5-29 Functions and features of the TN82EX2 Function and Feature Basic functions Remarks Service interfaces on the front panel Service processing capability Interface function Type of the loopback at a port Automatic loopback release at a port Port MTU Port bandwidth utilization statistics Two 10GE interfaces 20 Gbit/s in full-duplex MAC-layer inloop and outloop Supported Supported Supported
The inband DCN is supported. By default, the two ports on the board are enabled with the DCN function, and the DCN function can be automatically enabled or disabled. Automatic laser shutdown Traffic buffer time Link aggregation group (LAG) Back pressure Number of supported E-Line services Supported 17 ms Intra-board LAG Inter-board LAG Supported 4 k (when used with the TN81SCA) 8 k (when used with the TN82SCA) Supported Supported
5-44
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Function and Feature Number of VSIs that support E-LAN services Number of supported unidirectional static MPLS tunnels Number of supported bidirectional static MPLS tunnels Number of supported PWs
Remarks 1k 4 k (when used with the TN81SCA) 16 k (when used with the TN82SCA) 2 k (used with the TN81SCA) 8 k (used with the TN82SCA) 8 k (when used with the TN81SCA) 16 k (when used with the TN82SCA)
Dynamic MAC address Static MAC address Number of supported multicast groups Number of supported multicast group members in each multicast group
131071 2k 4k 24 k
Number of supported QinQ links Number of APS protection groups Number of ACLs MPLS tunnel OAM PW OAM PW APS Clock
1 k (when used with the TN81SCA) 4 k (when used with the TN82SCA) 1 k (shared by MPLS APS and PW APS) 4k Supported Supported Supports 1:1 PW APS with dual-ended switching. Synchronous Ethernet Transmitting and receiving of SSMs at a synchronous Ethernet interface IEEE 1588V2 protocol IEEE 1588V2 ACR clock Supported Supported
Supported Supported

The TN82EX2 mainly consists of the service processing module, transmission management module, switching buffer module, management module, clock module, and power supply module.
5 Processing Boards
Figure 5-9 shows the block diagram for the functions of the TN82EX2. Figure 5-9 Block diagram for the functions of the TN82EX2
Backplane
Service forwarding module 10GE Service access module Service processing module
Service signals
Service signals
Service signals
Service signal
XCS
Management bus
Management bus
Management bus
Management module Synchronous Ethernet clock IEEE 1588V2 packets Clock Module
Ethernet communication bus Inter-board communication bus System clocks Synchronous Ethernet clock IEEE 1588V2 packets
SCA
Other boards
XCS XCS XCS
0.9 V . . . 5V
. . .
-48 V/ -60 V
Power supply module
PIU PIU
-48 V/ -60 V
Transmit Direction
The switching buffer module processes cells from the cross-connect unit and then sends the cells to the transmission management module. The transmission management module rearranges the cells to packets, for which buffer and QoS management are performed. The packets are then sent to the service processing module for data encoding/decoding and parallel/serial conversion, and then the packets are sent to the 10GE optical interface.
Receive Direction
The service processing module performs O/E conversion for Ethernet signals from a port on the Ethernet equipment. Then, the service processing module performs encoding/decoding and serial/parallel conversion for data, performs route search or address matching for data packets, extracts protocol packets, and sends corresponding packets to the transmission management module. After buffering and scheduling packets, the transmission management module slices the packets into cells required by the switching network. After buffering the cells, the switching network buffer module sends the cells to the cross-connect unit.
Service Processing module

The service processing module performs the following functions: l In the receive direction, the service processing module receives 10GE signals through the interface on the front panel and then the service access module performs encoding/decoding and serial/parallel conversion for signals. The processed service signals are transmitted to
5-46
5 Processing Boards
the service forwarding module, thus implementing route search and address matching for data packets. l In the transmit direction, the service processing module receives signals from the transmission management module. After the encoding/decoding and serial/parallel conversion by the service access module, signals are transmitted through the interface on the front panel. The service processing module extracts protocol packets. The service processing module extracts synchronous Ethernet clock signals. The service processing module extracts IEEE 1588V2 packets.
l l l

The transmission management module slices packets into cells of a fixed length, and performs QoS and large-volume buffer. The functions supported by this module are listed as follows: l l QoS: QoS involves scheduling of flow queues and port queues, bandwidth restriction, and provision of related statistical information. Large-volume buffer: 17 ms buffer in the upstream and downstream in the case of 20 Gbit/ s traffic is supported.

The switching buffer module mainly buffers cells to the cross-connect board.
Management Module
The management module provides the management bus and communication bus, and manages each module on the board. In addition, this module reports the alarm and performance monitoring information to the SCA.
Clock Module
The clock module performs the following functions: l l l l Provides a clock for each module on the board. Supports synchronous Ethernet. Supports the IEEE 1588V2 protocol. Supports the IEEE 1588V2 ACR clock.
Power Supply Module

The power supply module converts the accessed DC voltage into various DC voltages required by each module on the board.
5.5.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the TN82EX2, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 5-10 shows the appearance of the front panel of the TN82EX2.
5 Processing Boards
Figure 5-10 Appearance of the front panel of the TN82EX2
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the TN82EX2. l l l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status ACT indicator, green, which indicates the service activation status PROG indicator, red or green, which indicates the running status of the program SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status L/A1 and L/A2 indicators, green or orange, which indicate the port connection and data receiving/transmitting status

5 Processing Boards
Interfaces
Two SFP interfaces, are present on the TN82EX2. Table 5-30 lists types and usage of the optical interfaces. For details on the fibers corresponding to the interfaces, see 13.1.1 Types of Fiber. Table 5-30 Types and usage of the interfaces on the TN82EX2 Interface on the Front Panel IN1-IN2 OUT1-OUT2 Interface Type LC LC Usage
Receives 10GE optical signals. Transmits 10GE optical signals.
NOTE The SFP interface should be used with an optical module. Two LC interfaces are provided on the left and right sides of the optical module. Each interface uses one fiber, which is used to transmit or receive service signals.
5.5.5 Valid Slots

The TN82EX2 can be housed in any of slots 1-8 and 11-18 of the subrack.

You can use the U2000 to set parameters for the TN82EX2. You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the TN82EX2. l l Ethernet interfaces Automatic laser shutdown

The technical specifications of the TN82EX2 cover the interface specifications, board dimensions, weight and power consumption. Table 5-31 lists the specifications of interfaces on the TN82EX2. Table 5-31 Technical specifications of the 10GE optical interface Item Optical interface type Specification Two-fiber bidirectional interface 10GBASE-S (0.3 km) Fiber type
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
10GBASE-L (10 km) Single-mode
10GBASE-E (40 km) Single-mode
10GBASE-Z (80 km) Single-mode

5-49
Multi-mode
5 Processing Boards
Item Working wavelength range (nm) Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Optical module part number
Specification 840 to 860 1260 to 1355 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
-7.3 to -1
-8.2 to 0.5
-4.7 to 4
0 to 4
-11.1 -1 3
-12.6 0.5 3.5
-14.1 -1 3
-21 -7 3
34060362
34060313
34060322
34060361
Board dimensions (mm): 261.4 (H) x 266.8 (D) x 25.4 (W) Board weight (kg): 1.22 Power consumption (W): 64.6
5.6 MP1
This section describes the MP1, a multi-protocol (TDM/IMA/ATM/ML-PPP) multi-interface (E1/STM-1) mother processing board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 5.6.1 Version Description The function version of the MP1 is TN81. 5.6.2 Functions and Features The MP1 provides a sub-slot to house one service sub-board. With a sub-board housed, the MP1 can access and process CES E1, IMA E1, ML-PPP E1, ATM STM-1, ATM E1, or channelized STM-1 signals. 5.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The MP1 mainly consists of the service sub-board module, transmission management module, switching buffer module, management module, power supply module and clock module. 5.6.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the MP1, there are indicators and a sub-slot for a sub-board. 5.6.5 Valid Slots The MP1 can be housed in any of slots 1-8 and 11-18 of the subrack.
5 Processing Boards
5.6.6 Board Configuration Reference To enable the MP1 board, the service subcard should be used together. For the details of configuring the board, refer to the configuration of the inserted service subcard. 5.6.7 Technical Specifications Specifications of the MP1 board cover board dimensions, weight and power consumption.

The function version of the MP1 is TN81.

The MP1 provides a sub-slot to house one service sub-board. With a sub-board housed, the MP1 can access and process CES E1, IMA E1, ML-PPP E1, ATM STM-1, ATM E1, or channelized STM-1 signals. Table 5-32 lists functions and features of the MP1. Table 5-32 Functions and features of the MP1 Function and Feature Basic function Description With a service sub-board housed, the MP1 can access and process CES E1, IMA E1, ML-PPP E1, ATM STM-1, ATM E1, or channalized STM-1 signals. Maximum access bandwidth QoS Queue Scheduling 1 Gbit/s Works with the service sub-board to perform the queue scheduling, and provides corresponding statistics information. Supports port-level traffic shaping in the downstream.
Traffic shaping Packet statistics
Collect statistics of the number of packets and cells.

The MP1 mainly consists of the service sub-board module, transmission management module, switching buffer module, management module, power supply module and clock module. Figure 5-11 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the MP1.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-51
5 Processing Boards
Figure 5-11 Block diagram for the working principle of the MP1
Backplane
Upstream processing module Downstream processing module Service sub-board module

AD1 CD1 MQ1/ MD1 ATM STM-1 Channelized STM-1 CES/IMA /ML-PPP
Service signals
Service signals
Service signals XCS
Management bus
Management bus
Management bus Management bus
Management module System clocks Line clocks
SCA
Service sub-boards Service sub-boards
System clocks
XCS XCS PIU PIU
Clock module
Line clocks
12V
. . .
-48 V/ -60 V
. . .
1.2V
Power supply module
-48 V/ -60 V

The interface converting module converts the signals sent by the cross-connect unit to parallel signals, which are then sent to the switching buffer module. The switching network buffer module processes the signal cells and sends the signal cells to the transmission management module for rearrangement. The transmission module rearranges the signal cells to recover packets, for which the buffer and QoS management are performed. The packets are then sent to the service sub-board module. Finally, the service sub-board module converts the parallel signals to serial signals, which are then sent to the service sub-board.

The service sub-board module converts the serial signals, sent by the service sub-board, to parallel signals, which are then sent to the transmission management module. The transmission management module slices packets into required cells, for which the QoS management and buffer are performed. The cells are then accessed to the switching buffer module. The switching buffer module switches the cells, and then sends the signals to the cross-connect unit.
Service Sub-board Module

This module mainly performs conversion between serial signals and parallel signals.

The transmission management module slices packets into cells and performs the QoS, line rate forwarding and large-capacity buffer functions. l QoS: This module provides five priorities for grooming queues at ports and provide corresponding statistics information.
5-52
5 Processing Boards
Line rate forwarding: This module can bidirectionally transmit and receive packets at the full line rate, that is, 1 Gbit/s.

This module mainly performs buffer, queue requital and grooming for cells. This module and the cross-connect unit form a three-level switching network to switch cells.
Management Module
This module provides buses and manages other modules of the board and the interface board used with the MP1. This module also monitors and reports alarms and performance events to the system control and communication unit.
Clock Module
This module provides clock signals for each module of the board. This module extracts and checks the clocks recovered from the line by the service sub-board. In addition, this module provides the system clock for the service sub-board.
Power supply module

This module converts the input DC voltage into various DC voltages required by each module on the board. This module also supplies power to the service sub-board and the interface board used with the MP1.
5.6.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the MP1, there are indicators and a sub-slot for a sub-board.

Figure 5-12 shows the front panel of the MP1.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-53
5 Processing Boards
Figure 5-12 Appearance of the front panel of the MP1
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the MP1. l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status PROG indicator, red or green, which indicates the running status of the program
Sub-Slot
The MP1 has one sub-slot, which is used to house one service sub-board. For details on the interface board for the MP1, refer to Table 3-2.
5-54
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
5.6.5 Valid Slots

The MP1 can be housed in any of slots 1-8 and 11-18 of the subrack.

To enable the MP1 board, the service subcard should be used together. For the details of configuring the board, refer to the configuration of the inserted service subcard.

Specifications of the MP1 board cover board dimensions, weight and power consumption. Board dimensions (mm): 261.4 (H) x 266.8 (D) x 25.4 (W) Weight (kg): 1.15 Power consumption (W): 43.1
5.7 MD1
This section describes the MD1, a 32 x E1 service sub-board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 5.7.1 Version Description The function version of the MD1 is TN81. 5.7.2 Functions and Features The MD1 mainly processes CES E1, IMA E1, ATM E1 and ML-PPP E1 services. The MD1 and the MP1 form a 32-channel multiprotocol packet E1 processing system. 5.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The MD1 mainly consists of the line processing module, service converting module, link layer processing module, data processing module, logic control module, clock module and power supply module. 5.7.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the MD1, there are indicators. 5.7.5 Valid Slots When the MD1 is used as a service sub-board, it should be housed in the sub-slot of the MP1. The MP1 should be used with the interface board, and thus the MP1 should be housed in any of slots 1-5 and 14-18. When the MP1 is used as the TPS protection board, the MP1 can only be housed in any of slots 5 and 14. Otherwise, when the MP1 is housed in any of slots 5 and 14, no corresponding interface board is available. 5.7.6 TPS Protection for Boards When used with the MP1 and interface board, the MD1 can provide two 1:N (N4) TPS protection groups. 5.7.7 Board Configuration Reference You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the MD1. 5.7.8 Technical Specifications Specifications of the MD1 board cover board dimensions, weight and power consumption.
5 Processing Boards

The function version of the MD1 is TN81.

The MD1 mainly processes CES E1, IMA E1, ATM E1 and ML-PPP E1 services. The MD1 and the MP1 form a 32-channel multiprotocol packet E1 processing system. Table 5-33 lists the functions and features of the MD1. Table 5-33 Functions and features of the MD1 Function and Feature Basic function Description Used with an interface board, the MD1 can access 32 x E1 services, and works with the MP1 and the D12/D75 to process the 32-channel multiprotocol packet E1 services. The CES, IMA, and ML-PPP protocols can be flexibly configured based on the E1 port. Supports the Fractional E1. Supports the CES services and IMA services at 64 kbit/s level. Collection of bandwidth utilization statistics at an IMA/ML-PPP port Inband DCN Bit error test function PRBSa IMA Supported. Supported. If bit errors occur in a certain period, the board reports an alarm. Supports the PRBS function in framed or unframed mode of an E1 port in the receive/transmit direction. Number of supported IMA groups Maximum number of supported E1 links of each IMA group 32 32 Supported.
Dynamically enables/disables IMA groups, restarts the IMA group protocol, and dynamically add/delete IMA group members. Supported traffic type Constant Bit Rate (CBR) Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) UBR+ Real Time Variable Bit Rate (rt-VBR) Non-real Time Variable Bit Rate (nrtVBR)
5 Processing Boards
Description Number of supported ATM services Number of supported ATM VP/VC switching connections 256 1k
Supports the encapsulation from ATM VPC/VCC to PWE3 in the Nto-1 (N32) and 1-to-1 formats. Supports the PW encapsulation for the ATM cells in the concatenation and non-concatenation formats. The number of PW connections that support the cell concatenation is 256, and the maximum number of concatenated cells is 31. UNI-side ATM OAM Supports the connection confirm (CC) test. Supports the loopback (LB) test. Supports the AIS. Supports the RDI. CES Number of supported CES services Supported emulation mode 32 CESoPSN SAToP Supports the timeslot suppression function. Provides the idle 64 kbit/ s timeslot suppression function for the CES services in the CESoPSN mode to save the transmission bandwidth. Supported clock mode Retiming Self-adaptation
Supports setting of the jitter compensation buffer time for the CES service. (Range: 0.375 ms to 64 ms; step: 0.125 ms) Supports setting of the packet loading time for the CES service. (Range: 0.125 ms to 3 ms; step: 0.125 ms) ML-PPP Supported number of MLPPP groups. Maximum number of supported links in each MLPPP group. Used as the NNI. APS for ML-PPP links APS 1+1 and 1:1 protection and APS 1+1 protection can be configured for the LSPs carried by ML-PPP links. 32 16
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-57
5 Processing Boards
Function and Feature TPS protection Clock
Description Supports the TPS protection. The priority can be set. Work with the interface boards to process the line clocks.
a: The PRBS test function and the port loopback function can not be enabled at the same time.

The MD1 mainly consists of the line processing module, service converting module, link layer processing module, data processing module, logic control module, clock module and power supply module. Figure 5-13 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the MD1. Figure 5-13 Block diagram for the working principle of the MD1
Interface boards
32 x E1
Line processing module
Service signals
Link layer processing module
Service signals
Data processing module
Service signals
Management bus
Management bus
Management module
MP1
Clock module
3.3V .
. .
1.2V
. . .
Power supply module

The MD1 first distributes packets, sent by the MP1, to different protocol processing modules by the service type. For data processing module, decapsulation should be performed. The ingress queue is then buffered and the egress queue is groomed by the service type. Then packets are sent to the link layer processing module. The line processing module performs encoding, dejitter, pulse shaping and line driving for the services, which are finally sent to the interface board.

The interface board accesses E1 signals. The line processing module then performs impedance match, signal equalization, electrical level conversion, clock data recovery, de-jitter and decoding for the E1 signals. The link layer processing module and data processing module perform encapsulation and mapping of IMA E1, CES E1 and ML-PPP E1 services to PWE3. In addition, PW grooming is performed. Finally, the E1 services are sent to the MP1 in the Ethernet packet format.
5-58
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Line Processing Module

In the receive channels, impedance match, signal equalization, electrical level conversion, clock data recovery, de-jitter and decoding are performed to signals. In the transmit channels, encoding, de-jitter, pulse shaping and line driving are performed to signals.
Link Layer Processing Module

This module supports three protocol types, that is, IMA, CES and ML-PPP. The TDM circuit switching, ATM cell switching can be performed on a uniform hardware platform.
Data Processing Module

This module performs encapsulation or decapsulation of IMA, CES and ML-PPP services to or from PWE3. In this way, data can be forwarded from the PPP to the MPLS. In addition, this module buffers the upstream and downstream packets, and grooms services.
Management Module
This module manages and controls the modules on the board.
Clock Module
This module works with the MP1 to process the line clock.
Power Supply Module

This module converts the voltage sent by the MP1 to DC voltages required by each module on the MD1.
5.7.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the MD1, there are indicators.

Figure 5-14 shows the appearance of the front panel of the MD1.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-59
5 Processing Boards
Figure 5-14 Appearance of the front panel of the MD1
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the MD1. l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status ACT indicator, green, which indicates the service activation status SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status
5.7.5 Valid Slots

When the MD1 is used as a service sub-board, it should be housed in the sub-slot of the MP1. The MP1 should be used with the interface board, and thus the MP1 should be housed in any of slots 1-5 and 14-18. When the MP1 is used as the TPS protection board, the MP1 can only be housed in any of slots 5 and 14. Otherwise, when the MP1 is housed in any of slots 5 and 14, no corresponding interface board is available. Table 5-34 lists the mapping relation between slots for the MP1 that houses the MD1 and slots for the corresponding interface board. Table 5-34 Mapping relation between slots for the MP1 that houses the MD1 and slots for the corresponding interface board Slot for the MP1 That Houses the MD1 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3
5-60
Slot for the Interface Board Slot 19 Slot 21 Slot 23
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Slot for the MP1 That Houses the MD1 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17 Slot 18
Slot for the Interface Board Slot 25 Slot 31 Slot 33 Slot 35 Slot 37
5.7.6 TPS Protection for Boards

When used with the MP1 and interface board, the MD1 can provide two 1:N (N4) TPS protection groups.
NOTE
The interface boards for the MD1 are D75 and D12. The two interface boards can realize the TPS protection when used with the MD1 and MP1. In addition, the protection principles and hardware configuration modes are the same. The TPS protection described in this document considers the D75 as an example.
Protection Principle
Figure 5-15 shows the TPS protection principle of the MD1. Figure 5-15 TPS protection principle of the service sub-board MD1
32 x E1 32 x E1 TPS control bus
D75
...
1
D75
System control unit
2 Protection service bus
MP1 MD1 Working board 1
MP1
MP1 Failure MD1 Protection board
...
MD1 Working board 4
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-61
5 Processing Boards
When the system control unit detects that a working MD1 or MP1 is faulty, the system control unit performs the protection switching by using the TPS control bus to trigger the switch on the interface board. After the switching, the services accessed by the interface board are switched to the protection board for processing. Thus, the protection is realized.
NOTE
The service sub-board and the MP1 that houses the service sub-board provide the TPS protection for the OptiX PTN 3900. Thus, during the switching, services on the working MD1 and MP1 are switched to the protection MD1 and MP1 at the same time.
Hardware Configuration
The MD1 is a service sub-board, which should be housed in the sub-slot of the MP1. When used with the MP1 and interface board, the MD1 can provide two 1:N (N4) TPS protection groups. Figure 5-16 shows the hardware configuration. Figure 5-16 Hardware configuration of two 1:4 TPS protection groups provided by the service sub-board MD1
S l o t S l o t S l o t S l o t S l o t S l o t S l o t S l o t S l o t 2 7 P I U S l o t 2 8 P I U S l o t 2 9 S C A S l o t S l o t S l o t S l o t S l o t S l o t S l o t S l o t S l o t
1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 D 7 5 D 7 5 D 7 5 D 7 5
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 S C A D 7 5 D 7 5 D 7 5 D 7 5
Fan slot 39 S S S S S S S S l l l l l l l l o o o o o o o o t t t t t t t t 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 S l o t 9 S l o t 1 0 X C S S S S S S S S S l l l l l l l l o o o o o o o o t t t t t t t t 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8
M M M M M P P P P P 1 1 1 1 1
X C S
M M M M M P P P P P 1 1 1 1 1
Fan slot 40 Air filter

NOTE
In the figure, each MP1 houses a service sub-board MD1. The two TPS protection groups are of the 1:4 protection. The board housed in slot 5 protects the boards housed in slots 1 - 4. The board housed in slot 14 protects the boards housed in slots 15 - 18. The equipment supports the function of setting TPS protection switching priorities. When more than one sub-boards are faulty, the one with high priority is protected.
5-62
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Table 5-35 shows the mapping relation between slots for the working boards and slots for the protection boards of the TPS protection. Table 5-35 Mapping relation between slots for the working boards and slots for the protection boards of the TPS protection for the service sub-board MD1 Slot for the Working Board Slots 1 - 4 Slots 15 - 18 Slot for the Protection Board Slot 5 Slot 14 Slot for the Interface Board Slots 19, 21, 23, 25 Slots 31, 33, 35, 37

You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the MD1. You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the MD1. l Spare timeslot recovery value

Specifications of the MD1 board cover board dimensions, weight and power consumption. Board dimensions (mm): 128.1 (H) x 197.1 (D) x 25.4 (W) Weight (kg): 0.34 Power consumption (W): 20.7
5.8 MQ1
This section describes the MQ1, a 63 x E1 service sub-board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 5.8.1 Version Description The function version of the MQ1 is TN81. 5.8.2 Functions and Features The MQ1 mainly processes CES E1, IMA E1, ATM E1 and ML-PPP E1 services. The MQ1 and the MP1 form a 63-channel multiprotocol packet E1 processing system. 5.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The MQ1 mainly consists of the line processing module, link layer processing module, data processing module, management module, clock module and power supply module. 5.8.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the MQ1, there are indicators. 5.8.5 Valid Slots
5 Processing Boards
When the MQ1 is used as a service sub-board, it should be housed in the sub-slot of the MP1. The MP1 should be used with the interface board, and thus the MP1 should be housed in any of slots 1 - 5 and 14 - 18. When the MP1 is used as the TPS protection board, the MP1 can only be housed in any of slots 5 and 14. Otherwise, when the MP1 is housed in any of slots 5 and 14, no corresponding interface board is available. 5.8.6 TPS Protection for Boards When used with the MP1 and interface board, the MQ1 can provide two 1:N (N4) TPS protection groups. 5.8.7 Board Configuration Reference You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the MQ1. 5.8.8 Technical Specifications Specifications of the MQ1 board cover board dimensions, weight and power consumption.

The function version of the MQ1 is TN81.

The MQ1 mainly processes CES E1, IMA E1, ATM E1 and ML-PPP E1 services. The MQ1 and the MP1 form a 63-channel multiprotocol packet E1 processing system. Table 5-36 lists the functions and features of the MQ1. Table 5-36 Functions and features of the MQ1 Function and Feature Basic function Description Used with interface boards, the MQ1 can access 63 x E1 services, and works with the MP1 and the D12/D75 to process the 63-channel multiprotocol packet E1 services. The CES, IMA, and ML-PPP protocols can be flexibly configured based on the E1 port. Supports the Fractional E1. Supports the CES services and IMA services at 64 kibt/s level. Collection of bandwidth utilization statistics at an IMA/ML-PPP port Inband DCN Bit error test function PRBSa IMA Supported. Supported. If bit errors occur in a certain period, the board reports an alarm. Supports the PRBS function in framed or unframed mode of an E1 port in the receive/transmit direction. Number of supported IMA groups 63 Supported.
5-64
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Description Maximum number of supported E1 links of each IMA group 32
Dynamically enables/disables IMA groups, restarts the IMA group protocol, and dynamically add/delete IMA group members. Supported traffic type CBR UBR UBR+ rt-VBR nrt-VBR Number of supported ATM services Number of supported ATM VP/VC switching connections 256 1k
Supports the encapsulation from ATM VPC/VCC to PWE3 in the Nto-1 (N32) and 1-to-1 formats. Supports the PW encapsulation for the ATM cells in the concatenation and non-concatenation formats. The number of PW connections that support the cell concatenation is 256, and the maximum number of concatenated cells is 31. UNI-side ATM OAM Supports the CC test. Supports the LB test. Supports the AIS. Supports the RDI. CES Number of supported CES services Supported emulation mode 63 CESoPSN SAToP Supports the timeslot suppression function. Provides the idle 64 kbit/ s timeslot suppression function for the CES services in the CESoPSN mode to save the transmission bandwidth. Supported clock mode Retiming Self-adaptation
Supports setting of the jitter compensation buffer time for the CES service. (Range: 0.375 ms to 64 ms; step: 0.125 ms)
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-65
5 Processing Boards
Description Supports setting of the packet loading time for the CES service. (Range: 0.125 ms to 3 ms; step: 0.125 ms)
ML-PPP
Supported number of MLPPP groups. Maximum number of supported links in each MLPPP group. Used as the NNI.
32 16
APS for ML-PPP links TPS protection Clock
APS 1+1 and 1:1 protection can be configured for the LSPs carried by ML-PPP links. Supports the TPS protection. The priority can be set. Work with the interface boards to process the line clocks.

The MQ1 mainly consists of the line processing module, link layer processing module, data processing module, management module, clock module and power supply module. Figure 5-17 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the MQ1. Figure 5-17 Block diagram for the working principle of the MQ1
Interface boards
63 x E1
Line processing module
Service signals
Link layer processing module
Service signals
Service signals
Management bus
Management bus
Management module
MP1
Clock module
3.3V .
. .
1.2V
. . .
Power supply module

The MQ1 first distributes packets sent by the MP1 to different protocol processing modules by the service type. For data processing module, decapsulation should be performed. The ingress queue is then buffered and the egress queue is groomed by the service type. Then packets are sent to the link layer processing module. The line processing module performs encoding, dejitter, pulse shaping and line driving for the services, which are finally sent to the interface board.
5 Processing Boards

The interface board accesses E1 signals. The line processing module then performs impedance match, signal equalization, electrical level conversion, clock data recovery, de-jitter and decoding for the E1 signals. The link layer processing module and data processing module perform encapsulation and mapping of IMA E1, CES E1 and ML-PPP E1 services to PWE3. In addition, PW grooming is performed. Finally, the E1 services are sent to the MP1 in the Ethernet packet format.
Line Processing Module

In the receive channels, impedance match, signal equalization, electrical level conversion, clock data recovery, de-jitter and decoding are performed to signals. In the transmit channels, encoding, de-jitter, pulse shaping and line driving are performed to signals.

This module supports three protocol types, that is, IMA, CES and ML-PPP. The TDM circuit switching, ATM cell switching can be performed on a uniform hardware platform.

This module performs encapsulation or decapsulation of IMA, CES and ML-PPP services to or from PWE3. In this way, data can be forwarded from the PPP to the MPLS.
Management Module
This module manages and controls the modules of the board.
Clock Module
Power Supply Module

This module converts the voltage sent by the MP1 to DC voltages required by each module on the board.
5.8.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the MQ1, there are indicators.

Figure 5-18 shows the appearance of the front panel of the MQ1.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-67
5 Processing Boards
Figure 5-18 Appearance of the front panel of the MQ1
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the MQ1. l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status ACT indicator, green, which indicates the service activation status SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status
5.8.5 Valid Slots

When the MQ1 is used as a service sub-board, it should be housed in the sub-slot of the MP1. The MP1 should be used with the interface board, and thus the MP1 should be housed in any of slots 1 - 5 and 14 - 18. When the MP1 is used as the TPS protection board, the MP1 can only be housed in any of slots 5 and 14. Otherwise, when the MP1 is housed in any of slots 5 and 14, no corresponding interface board is available. Table 5-37 lists the mapping relation between slots for the MP1 that houses the MQ1 and slots for the interface board. Table 5-37 Mapping relation between slots for the MP1 that houses the MQ1 and slots for the corresponding interface board Slot for the MP1 That Houses the MQ1 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3
5-68
Slot for the Interface Board Slots 19 - 20 Slots 21 - 22 Slots 23 - 24
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Slot for the MP1 That Houses the MQ1 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17 Slot 18
Slot for the Interface Board Slots 25 - 26 Slots 31 - 32 Slots 33 - 34 Slots 35 - 36 Slots 37 - 38
For details on the interface board for the MQ1, refer to Table 3-2.
5.8.6 TPS Protection for Boards

When used with the MP1 and interface board, the MQ1 can provide two 1:N (N4) TPS protection groups.
NOTE
The interface boards of the MQ1 are D75 and D12. The two interface boards can realize the TPS protection when used with the MQ1 and MP1. In addition, the protection principles and configuration modes are the same. The TPS protection described in this document considers the D75 interface board as an example.
Protection Principle
Figure 5-19 shows the TPS protection principle of the MQ1. Figure 5-19 TPS protection principle of the service sub-board MQ1
63 x E1 63 x E1 TPS control bus
D75
D75
...
1
D75
D75
System control unit
2 Protection service bus
MP1 MQ1 Working board 1
MP1
MP1 Failure MQ1 Protection board
...
MQ1 Working board 4
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-69
5 Processing Boards
When the system control unit detects that a working MQ1 or MP1 is faulty, the system control unit performs the protection switching by using the TPS control bus to trigger the switch on the interface board. After the switching, the services accessed by the interface board are switched to the protection board for processing. Thus, the protection is realized.
NOTE
The service sub-board and the MP1 that houses the service sub-board provide the TPS protection for the OptiX PTN 3900. Thus, during the switching, services on the working MQ1 and MP1 are switched to the protection MQ1 and MP1 at the same time.
Hardware Configuration
The MQ1 is a service sub-board, which should be housed in the sub-slot of the MP1. When used with the MP1 and interface board, the MQ1 can provide two 1:N (N4) TPS protection groups. Figure 5-20 shows the hardware configuration. Figure 5-20 Hardware configuration of two 1:4 TPS protection groups provided by the service sub-board MQ1
S L O T 1 9 S L O T 2 0 S L O T 2 1 S L O T 2 2 S L O T 2 3 S L O T 2 4 S L O T 2 5 S L O T 2 6 S L O T 2 7 P I U S L O T 2 8 P I U S L O T 2 9 S C A S L O T 3 0 S C A S L O T 3 1 S L O T 3 2 S L O T 3 3 S L O T 3 4 S L O T 3 5 S L O T 3 6 S L O T 3 7 S L O T 3 8
D D D D D D D D 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
D D D D D D D D 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
FAN SLOT 39 S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S L O T 8 S L O T 9 X C S S L O T 1 0 X C S S L O T 1 1 S L O T 1 2 S L O T 1 3 S L O T 1 4 S L O T 1 5 S L O T 1 6 S L O T 1 7 S L O T 1 8
M M M M M P P P P P 1 1 1 1 1 Fiber trough
M M M M M P P P P P 1 1 1 1 1 Fiber trough
FAN SLOT 40 Air filter

NOTE
In the figure, each MP1 houses a service sub-board MQ1. The two TPS protection groups are of the 1:4 protection. The board housed in slot 5 protects the boards housed in slots 1-4. The board housed in slot 14 protects the boards housed in slots 15-18.
5-70
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Table 5-38 shows the mapping relation between slots for the working boards and slots for the protection boards of the TPS protection. Table 5-38 Mapping relation between slots for the working boards and slots for the protection boards of the TPS protection for the service sub-board MQ1 Slot for the Working Board Slot 1 - 4 Slot 15 - 18 Slot for the Protection Board Slot 5 Slot 14 Slot for the Interface Board Slot 19 - 26 Slot 31 - 38

You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the MQ1. You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the MQ1. l Spare timeslot recovery value

Specifications of the MQ1 board cover board dimensions, weight and power consumption. Board dimensions (mm): 128.1 (H) x 197.1 (D) x 25.4 (W) Weight (kg): 0.34 Power consumption (W): 27.9
5.9 CD1
This section describes the CD1, a 2 x channelized STM-1 sub-board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 5.9.1 Version Description The function version of the CD1 is TN81. 5.9.2 Functions and Features When used with the MP1, the CD1 processes channelized STM-1 services. The CD1 can map packet E1 data into VC-12 for transmission. The CES, IMA, ATM E1 and ML-PPP E1 can be bundled for transmission. 5.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The CD1 mainly consists of the SDH processing module, link layer processing module, data processing module, management module, clock module and power supply module. 5.9.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the CD1, there are indicators, a laser safety class label and interfaces.
5 Processing Boards
5.9.5 Valid Slots The CD1, which is a service sub-board, should be housed in the sub-slot of the MP1. 5.9.6 Board Configuration Reference You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the CD1. 5.9.7 Technical Specifications Specifications of the CD1 board cover specifications of interfaces, board dimensions, weight and power consumption.

The function version of the CD1 is TN81.

When used with the MP1, the CD1 processes channelized STM-1 services. The CD1 can map packet E1 data into VC-12 for transmission. The CES, IMA, ATM E1 and ML-PPP E1 can be bundled for transmission. Table 5-39 lists the functions and features of the CD1. Table 5-39 Functions and features of the CD1 Function and Feature Basic function Description Supports two channelized STM-1 optical interfaces on the front panel. Supports the Fractional E1. Supports the CES services and IMA services at 64 kibt/s level. Supports collection of bandwidth utilization statistics at an IMA/MLPPP port. Interface function Automatic shutdown of the laser at the port Type of the loopback at the port Supported. Inloop at an STM-1 port Outloop at an STM-1 port Inloop in a VC-12 channel Outloop in a VC-12 channel Automatic releasing of the loopback at the port Supported.
All VC-12 timeslots of each CD1 optical interface support the DCN function. By default, only the first, seventeenth, thirty-third, and fortyninth channels of VC-12 timeslots of each optical interface support the DCN function. Manually enabling or disabling the DCN function of VC-12 timeslots of CD1 optical interface is supported. PRBSa Supports the PRBS function in framed or unframed mode of a VC-12 channel in the receive/transmit direction.
5-72
5 Processing Boards
Function and Feature IMA
Description Number of supported IMA groups Maximum number of supported VC-12 timeslots of each IMA group 126 32
Dynamically enables/disables IMA groups, restarts the IMA group protocol, and dynamically add/delete IMA group members. Supported traffic type CBR UBR UBR+ rt-VBR nrt-VBR Number of supported ATM services Number of supported ATM VP/VC switching connections 256 (128 supported by each optical interface) 1 k (512 supported by each optical interface)
Supports the encapsulation from ATM VPC/VCC to PWE3 in the Nto-1 (N32) and 1-to-1 formats. Supports the PW encapsulation for the ATM cells in the concatenation and non-concatenation formats. The number of PW connections that support the cell concatenation is 256, and the maximum number of concatenated cells is 31. UNI-side ATM OAM Supports the CC test. Supports the LB test. Supports the AIS. Supports the RDI. CES Number of supported CES services Supported emulation mode 126 CESoPSN SAToP Supports the timeslot suppression function. Provides the idle 64 kbit/ s timeslot suppression function for the CES services in the CESoPSN mode to save the transmission bandwidth. Supported clock mode Retiming Self-adaptation
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-73
5 Processing Boards
Description Supports setting of the jitter compensation buffer time for the CES service. (Range: 0.375 ms to 64 ms; step: 0.125 ms) Supports setting of the packet loading time for the CES service. (Range: 0.125 ms to 3 ms; step: 0.125 ms)
ML-PPP
Supported number of MLPPP groups. Maximum number of supported links in each MLPPP group. Used as the NNI.
64 16
Extraction and insertion of S1 bytes LMSP protection
Supported. Supports the 1+1 LMSP and 1:1 LMSP protection.

The CD1 mainly consists of the SDH processing module, link layer processing module, data processing module, management module, clock module and power supply module. Figure 5-21 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the CD1. Figure 5-21 Block diagram for the working principle of the CD1
Channelized STM-1 SDH processing module Service signals Link layer processing module Service signals Data processing module Service signals
Management bus
Management bus Management module
MP1
Clock module
3.3V .
. .
1.2V
. . .
Power supply module

The CD1 first distributes signals, sent by the MP1, to different protocol processing modules according to the service type. These chips then decapsulate these signals. The data processing
5 Processing Boards
module buffers the ingress queues and grooms the egress queues according to the service type. The data processing module then sends the packets to the link layer processing module. The link layer processing module processes the packets according to different protocols, and then frames the processed signals and sends the signals to the SDH processing module, which adds overhead to the signals and multiplexes the signals to STM-1 signals.

The SDH processing module first processes overhead of the channelized STM-1 signals that are accessed, and demultiplexes the signals to E1 signals. The SDH processing module sends the E1 signals to the link layer processing module, which frames the E1 signals and processes the framed signals according to the different protocols. The processed signals are then sent to the data processing module. The data processing module performs PWE3 encapsulation for IMA, CES and ML-PPP services, and grooms the PW connections. Finally, the data processing module sends the packets to the MP1.
SDH Processing Module

In the transmit direction, this module adds overhead to the signals and multiplexes the E1 signals to STM-1 signals. In the receive direction, this module processes overhead of the STM-1 signals, and demultiplexes the channelized STM-1 signals into E1 signals.

This module frames E1 siganals, and supports three protocol types, that is, IMA, CES and MLPPP. The TDM circuit switching, ATM cell switching can be performed on a uniform hardware platform.

This module performs PWE3 encapsulation and decapsulation for IMA, CES and ML-PPP multiple services, and forwards data according to the MPLS tags in the PPP packets. In addition, this module buffers the upstream and downstream packets, and grooms services.
Management Module
Clock Module
Power Supply Module

This module converts the voltage, sent by the MP1, to DC voltages required by each module on the CD1.
5.9.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the CD1, there are indicators, a laser safety class label and interfaces.
5 Processing Boards

Figure 5-22 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CD1. Figure 5-22 Appearance of the front panel of the CD1
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the CD1. l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status ACT indicator, green, which indicates the service activation status SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status

The laser safety class is of CLASS 1. For an optical interface of this class, the maximum output optical power is less than 10 dBm (10 mW).
Interface
On the CD1, two SFP interfaces are present. Table 5-40 lists the types and usage of the interfaces. For fiber corresponding to the interfaces, see 13.1.1 Types of Fiber.
5-76
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Table 5-40 Types and usage of the interfaces on the CD1 Interface on the Front Panel IN1 - IN2 Interface Type LC Usage
When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input interface for the STM-1 optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is not used.
OUT1 - OUT2
LC
When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an output interface for the STM-1 optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input/output interface for the STM-1 optical signal.
NOTE The SFP interface should be used with an optical module. l When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, two LC interfaces are provided on the left and right sides of the optical module. Each interface uses one fiber, which is used to transmit or receive service signals. l When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, only one LC interface is provided on the left side of the optical module. This optical interface uses only one fiber, which is used to transmit and receive service signals at the same time.
5.9.5 Valid Slots

The CD1, which is a service sub-board, should be housed in the sub-slot of the MP1.

You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the CD1. You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the CD1. l l l l l l l l l Automatic Laser Shutdown J0 J1 J2 C2 V5 SDH Interface Path Configuration Spare Timeslot Recovery Value

Specifications of the CD1 board cover specifications of interfaces, board dimensions, weight and power consumption. Table 5-41 lists the specifications of interfaces on the CD1.
5 Processing Boards
Table 5-41 Technical specifications of the STM-1 optical interface Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Optical interface type Specification 155520 Two-fiber bidirectional interface S-1.1 (15 km) Fiber type Working wavelength range (nm) Single-mode 1261 to 1360 L-1.1 (40 km) Single-mode 1263 to 1360 L-1.2 (80 km) Single-mode 1480 to 1580 Single-fiber bidirectional interface S-1.1 (10 km) Single-mode For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of single-fiber bidirectional optical interface and wavelength allocation. -15 to -8 L-1.1 (40 km) Single-mode For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of single-fiber bidirectional optical interface and wavelength allocation. -5 to 0
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-28
-34
-34
-28.2
-30
-8 8.2
-10 10
-10 10
-8 6.6
-10 10
34060276
34060281
34060282
For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of single-fiber bidirectional optical interface and wavelength allocation.
For details, see the following table, related optical module part number of single-fiber bidirectional optical interface and wavelength allocation.
5-78
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Table 5-42 Related optical module part numbers of single-fiber bidirectional interface optical interface and wavelength allocation Item Optical module part number (15 km) Optical module part number (40 km) Transmitter wavelength (nm) Receiver wavelength (nm) 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1580 1480 to 1580 1260 to 1360 34060328 34060329 Local 34060363 Remote 34060364
5.10 AD1
This section describes the AD1, a 2 x STM-1 ATM sub-board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 5.10.1 Version Description The function version of the AD1 is TN81. 5.10.2 Functions and Features The AD1, an ATM service processing board, is used to access 2 x STM-1 ATM services, switch ATM services and map ATM services to the PWE3. The AD1 processes the protocols for ATM services, manages connections and resources, performs performance counting, grooms the traffic and controls the congestion for the ATM layer. The AD1 complies with RFC 2515. The AD1 should be used with the MP1. 5.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The AD1 mainly consists of the ATM access module, ATM processing module, data processing module, management module, clock module and power module. 5.10.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the AD1, there are indicators, a laser safety class label and interfaces. 5.10.5 Valid Slots The AD1, which is a service sub-board, should be used with the MP1. 5.10.6 Board Configuration Reference You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the AD1. 5.10.7 Technical Specifications Specifications of the AD1 cover specifications of interfaces, board dimensions, weight and power consumption.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-79
5 Processing Boards

The function version of the AD1 is TN81.

The AD1, an ATM service processing board, is used to access 2 x STM-1 ATM services, switch ATM services and map ATM services to the PWE3. The AD1 processes the protocols for ATM services, manages connections and resources, performs performance counting, grooms the traffic and controls the congestion for the ATM layer. The AD1 complies with RFC 2515. The AD1 should be used with the MP1. Table 5-43 lists the functions and features of the AD1. Table 5-43 Functions and Features of the AD1 Function and Feature Basic function Interface function Description Service interface on the front panel Automatic shutdown of the laser at the port Type of the loopback at the port Automatic releasing of the loopback at the port ATM Supported traffic type Two ATM STM-1 optical interfaces. Supported. Inloop Outloop Supported. CBR UBR UBR+ rt-VBR nrt-VBR Number of supported ATM services Number of supported ATM VP/VC switching connections 1 k (512 supported by each optical interface) 2 k (1 k supported by each optical interface)
Supports the encapsulation from ATM VPC/VCC to PWE3 in the Nto-1 (N32) and 1-to-1 formats. Supports the PW encapsulation for the ATM cells in the concatenation and non-concatenation formats. The number of PW connections that support the cell concatenation is 512, and the maximum number of concatenated cells is 31. UNI-side ATM OAM Supports the CC test. Supports the LB test.
5 Processing Boards
Description Supports the AIS. Supports the RDI.
LMSP protection Extraction and insertion of S1 bytes
Supports the 1+1 LMSP and 1:1 LMSP protection. The protection switching time is less than 50 ms. Supported.

The AD1 mainly consists of the ATM access module, ATM processing module, data processing module, management module, clock module and power module. Figure 5-23 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the AD1. Figure 5-23 Block diagram for the working principle of the AD1
ATM STM-1
ATM access module
Service signals
ATM processing module
Service signals
Service signals
Management bus
Management bus
Management module 3.3V .

. .
MP1
Clock module
1.2V
. . .
Power supply module

The MP1 sends packets to the data processing module, which demaps the PWE3 to ATM services and switches the ATM services. The data processing module then sends the ATM services to the ATM lprocessing module. The ATM processing module processes the protocols for ATM services, manages connections and resources, performs performance counting, grooms the traffic and controls the congestion for the ATM layer. The ATM processing module then sends the services to the ATM access module. In the ATM access module, ATM services are mapped into SDH services, which become STM-1 ATM optical signals after converted from electrical signals to optical signals.

First, 2 x STM-1 ATM optical signals are converted to electrical signals and sent to the ATM access module. This module extracts ATM cells from the SDH services and sends the ATM cells to the ATM layer processing module. The ATM processing module then processes the protocols
5 Processing Boards
for ATM services, manages connections and resources, performs performance counting, grooms the traffic and controls the congestion for the ATM layer. The services are then sent to the data processing module. The data processing module switches the ATM services and maps the ATM services to the PWE3. Finally, services are sent to the MP1.
ATM Access Module

This module performs the following functions: l In the upstream direction, the SDH overheads, alarms, and pointers are processed on the accessed ATM STM-1 signals. The ATM cells are extracted from the SDH signals, and then the ATM cells are sent to the ATM processing module, where the line clock is extracted. In the downstream direction, the ATM cells from the ATM processing module are mapped to the SDH signals, and then the SDH overhead processing, alarm processing, and pointer processing are performed on the signals. In this manner, the SDH frames are formed.
ATM Processing Module

This module mainly realizes the VP/VC switching, QoS functions such as traffic management, traffic shaping, queue scheduling, and OAM function for the ATM cells. l In the upstream direction, this module determines the traffic priority of the ATM cells. If congestion occurs, this module determines whether to discard the cells or to continue transmitting cells according to the traffic priority. If the cells are continued to be transmitted, the VP/VC switching is performed on the cells, which are then sent to the data processing module. In the downstream direction, this module processes the cell packet headers, and performs the VP/VC switching on the cells. If congestion occurs, this module determines whether to discard the cells or to continue transmitting cells according to the traffic priority. If the cells are continued to be transmitted, they are sent to the ATM access module. Supports the ATM OAM functions: Supports the CC test. Supports the LB test.

This module performs the following functions. l l Encapsulates or decapsulate ATM cells to or from the PWE3. Concatenates or deconcatenate ATM cells to or from the PWE3.
Management Module
Clock Module
5 Processing Boards
Power Supply Module

This module converts the voltage, sent by the MP1, to DC voltages required by each module on the AD1.
5.10.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AD1, there are indicators, a laser safety class label and interfaces.

Figure 5-24 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AD1. Figure 5-24 Appearance of the front panel of the AD1
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AD1. l l l STAT indicator, red, green or orange, which indicates the board state ACT indicator, green, which indicates that the service is activated SRV indicator, red, green or orange, which indicates service alarms

Interface
On the AD1, two SFP interfaces are present. Table 5-44 lists the types and usage of the interfaces. For fiber corresponding to the interfaces, see 13.1.1 Types of Fiber.
5 Processing Boards
Table 5-44 Types and usage of the interfaces on the AD1 Interface on the Front Panel IN1-IN2 Interface Type LC Usage
When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input interface for the STM-1 optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is not used.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an output interface for the STM-1 optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input/output interface for the STM-1 optical signal.
5.10.5 Valid Slots

The AD1, which is a service sub-board, should be used with the MP1.

You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the AD1. You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the AD1. l l l l l Automatic Laser Shutdown J0 J1 C2 SDH Interface

Specifications of the AD1 cover specifications of interfaces, board dimensions, weight and power consumption. Table 5-45 lists the specifications of interfaces on the AD1.
5-84
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5 Processing Boards
Table 5-45 Technical specifications of the STM-1 optical interface Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Optical interface type Specification 155520 Two-fiber bidirectional interface S-1.1 (15 km) Fiber type Working wavelength range (nm) Single-mode 1261 to 1360 L-1.1 (40 km) Single-mode 1263 to 1360 L-1.2 (80 km) Single-mode 1480 to 1580 Single-fiber bidirectional interface S-1.1 (10 km) Single-mode For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of single-fiber bidirectional optical interface and wavelength allocation. -15 to -8 L-1.1 (40 km) Single-mode For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of single-fiber bidirectional optical interface and wavelength allocation. -5 to 0
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-28
-34
-34
-28.2
-30
-8 8.2
-10 10
-10 10
-8 6.6
-10 10
34060276
34060281
34060282
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
5-85
5 Processing Boards
5-86
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6 Interface Boards
6
About This Chapter
Interface Boards
Interface boards are mainly used to connect to cables and fibers. This chapter describes the interface boards for the OptiX PTN 3900, in terms of the version, function, working principle, front panel, and parameters. 6.1 ETFC This section describes the ETFC, a 12 x FE electrical interface board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 6.2 EFF8 This section describes the EFF8, which is an 8 x FE optical interface board, with regard to the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications. 6.3 EFG2 This section describes the EFG2, a 2 x GE optical interface board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 6.4 EFG4 This section describes the EFG4, a 4 x GE optical interface board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, configuration reference, and technical specifications. 6.5 POD41 This section describes the POD41, a 2 x 622M/155M POS interface board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 6.6 AFO1 This section describes the AFO1, an 8-channel ATM STM-1 service interface board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications. 6.7 D75/D12 This section describes the D75/D12, a 32 x E1 75-ohm interface board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6-1
6 Interface Boards
6.1 ETFC
This section describes the ETFC, a 12 x FE electrical interface board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 6.1.1 Version Description The function version of the ETFC is TN81. 6.1.2 Functions and Features The ETFC accesses 12 x FE electrical signals, and processes the services with the processing board EG16/EG8. 6.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The ETFC mainly consists of interface conversion module, service processing module, management module, clock module and power supply module. 6.1.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the ETFC, there are indicators and interfaces. 6.1.5 Valid Slots The slot that houses the ETFC in the interface area is determined by the slot that houses the processing board used with the ETFC. 6.1.6 Board Configuration Reference You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the ETFC. 6.1.7 Technical Specifications Specifications of the ETFC board cover the interface specifications, board dimensions, weight and power consumption.

The function version of the ETFC is TN81.

The ETFC accesses 12 x FE electrical signals, and processes the services with the processing board EG16/EG8. Table 6-1 lists the functions and features of the ETFC. Table 6-1 Functions and Features of the ETFC Function and Feature Basic function Interface function Description Service interface on the front panel Type of the loopback at the port Automatic releasing of the loopback at the port
6-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12 FE electrical interfaces PHY layer inloop MAC layer inloop Supported.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6 Interface Boards
Description Port bandwidth utilization statistics Supported.
Supports the inband DCN, which can be manually enabled and disabled. The DCN function is enabled for the first four ports by default. LAG Inter-board Intra-board Supported. Supported.

The ETFC mainly consists of interface conversion module, service processing module, management module, clock module and power supply module. Figure 6-1 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the ETFC. Figure 6-1 Block diagram for the working principle of the ETFC
Backplane
12 x FE signals
Interface conversion module
Service signals
Service processing module
Service signals
EG16
Management bus
Management module
Management bus
EG16 EG16
Clock module
3.3V
. . .
System clock
. . .
1.2V
Power supply module
-48V/-60V -48V/-60V
PIU PIU
NOTE
The processing board for the ETFC is the EG16/EG8. The functional block diagram of the EG16 is considered as an example.
In the Downstream Direction

The high speed service packets from the EG16/EG8 are accessed through the port on the backplane of the ETFC, and then sent to the service processing module. The service processing module converts the high speed packets to the FE service packets, and sends the processing packets to the interface conversion module, which performs the coding/decoding and parallel/ serial conversion on the service packets. Finally, the service signals are sent though the FE ports.
In the Upstream Direction

The FE services are accessed to the interface conversion module through the FE ports. The interface conversion module performs the coding/decoding and serial/parallel conversion, and
6 Interface Boards
then sends the packets to the service processing module, which converts the FE service packets to the high speed packets. Finally, the high speed packets are sent to the EG16/EG8 through the interface on the port on the backplane.
Interface Conversion Module

This module performs the following functions: l In the upstream direction, this module accesses the FE services and performs the lightning protection, and then performs the coding/decoding and serial/parallel conversion. Finally, the processing service packets are sent to the service processing module. In the downstream direction, this module receives the service packets sent by the service processing module, and performs the coding/decoding and serial/parallel conversion. Finally, the service packets are sent to each FE port.

This module performs the following functions: l In the upstream direction, this module receives the service packets sent by the interface conversion module, and converts the FE service packets to the high speed packets, and then sends the packets to the ports on the backplane. In the downstream direction, this module converts the high speed packets, sent through the ports on the backplane, to the FE service packets, and then sends the packets to the interface conversion module.
Management Module
Clock Module
This module performs the following functions: Realizes the clock phase-locked function, and provides the working clock for each module on the board.
Power Supply Module

This module provides the DC voltages for each module on the board.
6.1.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the ETFC, there are indicators and interfaces.
CAUTION
It is not recommended that the FE ports on the ETFC be used as the network-side ports.
6-4
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6 Interface Boards

Figure 6-2 shows the appearance of the front panel of the ETFC. Figure 6-2 Appearance of the front panel of the ETFC
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the ETFC. l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status ACT indicator, green, which indicates the service activation status SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6-5
6 Interface Boards
Interface
Table 6-2 lists the types and usage of the interfaces of the ETFC. These interfaces support autoadaptation to a straight-through network cable or a crossover network cable. For details on the cables connected to the interfaces, see 13.3.1 Ethernet Cable. Table 6-2 Types and usage of the interfaces on the ETFC Interface on the Front Panel FE1 - FE12 Interface Type RJ-45 Usage Access the first to twelfth Ethernet electrical signals.
Table 6-3 lists the pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector on the ETFC. Table 6-3 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector on the ETFC Front View Pin No. 1 2
87654321
Usage Positive of twisted pair 1 Negative of twisted pair 1 Positive of twisted pair 2 Unspecified Unspecified Negative of twisted pair 2 Unspecified Unspecified
3 4 5 6 7 8
6.1.5 Valid Slots

The slot that houses the ETFC in the interface area is determined by the slot that houses the processing board used with the ETFC. For the OptiX PTN 3900, the ETFC can be housed in any of slots 19 - 26 and 31 - 38 in the interface area. When used with the EG16 or the EG8, the ETFC can access and process services from the Ethernet electrical interface. For the slot mapping relations of the ETFC and the EG16 or of the ETFC and the EG8, see Table 5-4 or Table 5-20 .
NOTE
When used with the EG16, if the ETFC is housed in slot 22, slot 26, slot 34 or slot 38, the last port is not available.
6-6
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6 Interface Boards

You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the ETFC. You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the ETFC. l Ethernet Interface

Specifications of the ETFC board cover the interface specifications, board dimensions, weight and power consumption. Table 6-4 lists the interface specifications of the ETFC. Table 6-4 Interface specifications of the ETFC Item Electrical interface rate RJ-45 electrical interface specification Specification 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s Compliant with the IEEE 802.3
6.2 EFF8
This section describes the EFF8, which is an 8 x FE optical interface board, with regard to the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications. 6.2.1 Version Description The function version of the EFF8 is TN81. 6.2.2 Functions and Features The EFF8 mainly accesses 8 x FE services, and processes the services with the processing board EG16/EG8. 6.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The EFF8 mainly consists of the interface conversion module, service processing module, management module, clock module, and power module. 6.2.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the EFF8, there are indicators and interfaces. 6.2.5 Valid Slots The valid slots for the EFF8 vary with the slot housing the EG16/EG8. 6.2.6 Board Configuration Reference
6 Interface Boards
You can use the U2000 to set parameters for the EFF8. 6.2.7 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the EFF8 include the interface specifications, board dimensions, weight and power consumption.

The function version of the EFF8 is TN81.

The EFF8 mainly accesses 8 x FE services, and processes the services with the processing board EG16/EG8. Table 6-5 lists the functions and features of the EFF8. Table 6-5 Functions and Features of the EFF8 Function and Feature Basic function Interface function Description Service interface on the front panel Type of the loopback at the port Automatic releasing of the loopback at the port Port bandwidth utilization statistics Eight FE optical interfaces. PHY layer inloop MAC layer outloop Supported. Supported.
Supports the inband DCN, which can be manually enabled and disabled. The DCN function is enabled for the first four ports by default. Automatic laser shutdown LAG Supported. Inter-board Intra-board Back pressure Clock Supported Synchronous Ethernet IEEE 1588 V2 protocol 1588 ACR clock Transmitting and receiving the synchronous status message (SSM) of synchronous Ethernet ports. Supported. Supported. Supported. Supported. Supported.
6-8
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6 Interface Boards

The EFF8 mainly consists of the interface conversion module, service processing module, management module, clock module, and power module. Figure 6-3 shows the block diagram for the functions of the EFF8. Figure 6-3 Block diagram for the functions of the EFF8
Backplane
8 x FE signals
Service signals
Management bus
Service signals
EG16
Management bus
Synchronous Ethernet clocks
IEEE 1588 V2 packets System clock Synchronous Ethernet clocks IEEE 1588 V2 packets
Management module
Management bus 3.3V
. . .
Clock module
EG16 EG16 EG16 EG16 PIU PIU
. . .
1.2V
Power supply module
-48V/-60V -48V/-60V
NOTE
The processing board for the EFF8 is the EG16/EG8. The functional block diagram of the EG16 is considered as an example.

The high speed service packets from the EG16/EG8 are accessed through the port on the backplane of the EFF8, and then sent to the service processing module. The service processing module converts the high speed packets to the FE service packets, and sends the processing packets to the interface conversion module, which performs the coding/decoding and parallel/ serial conversion on the service packets. Finally, the service signals are sent though the FE ports.

The FE services are accessed to the interface conversion module through the FE ports. The interface conversion module performs the coding/decoding and serial/parallel conversion, and then sends the packets to the service processing module, which converts the FE service packets to the high speed packets. Finally, the high speed packets are sent to the EG16/EG8 through the interface on the port on the backplane.

This module performs the following functions: l In the upstream direction, this module accesses the FE services, and then performs the coding/decoding and serial/parallel conversion. Finally, the processing service packets are sent to the service processing module.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6 Interface Boards
In the downstream direction, this module receives the service packets sent by the service processing module, and performs the coding/decoding and serial/parallel conversion. Finally, the service packets are sent to each FE port.

This module performs the following functions: l In the upstream direction, this module receives the service packets sent by the interface conversion module, and converts the FE service packets to the high speed packets, and then sends the packets to the ports on the backplane. In the downstream direction, this module converts the high speed packets, sent through the ports on the backplane, to the FE service packets, and then sends the packets to the interface conversion module. Extracts and inserts synchronous Ethernet clock signals. Extracts and inserts IEEE 1588 V2 packets.
l l
Management Module
Clock Module
This module performs the following functions: l l l l Provides the working clock for each module on the EFF8. Supports the synchronous Ethernet. Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 protocol. Supports the 1588 ACR clock.
Power Supply Module

This module performs the power supplies for the modules on the board.
6.2.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the EFF8, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 6-4 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EFF8.
6-10
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6 Interface Boards
Figure 6-4 Font Panel of the EFF8
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the EFF8: l l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status ACT indicator, green, which indicates the service activation status SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status L/A1 to L/A8 indicators, orange or green, which indicate the service transmit and receive status
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6-11
6 Interface Boards
Interfaces
Eight SFP interfaces are present on the EFF8. Table 6-6 lists the number of interfaces, types, and usage of the interfaces. For fiber corresponding to the interfaces, see 13.1.1 Types of Fiber. Table 6-6 Interfaces of the EFF8 Interface on the Front Panel IN1 - IN8 Interface Type LC Usage When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input interface for the FE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is not used. OUT1 - OUT8 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an output interface for the FE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input/output interface for the FE optical signal.
6.2.5 Valid Slots

The valid slots for the EFF8 vary with the slot housing the EG16/EG8. In the case of the OptiX PTN 3900, the EFF8 can be housed in any of slots 19 to 26 and slots 31 to 38 in the interface area. The EFF8 accesses and processes the Ethernet services when used together with the EG16 or the EG8. For the slot mapping relations of the EFF8 and the EG16 or of the EFF8 and the EG8, see Table 5-4 or Table 5-20 .

You can use the U2000 to set parameters for the EFF8. You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the EFF8: l l Ethernet interface Automatic Laser Shutdown

6 Interface Boards

The technical specifications of the EFF8 include the interface specifications, board dimensions, weight and power consumption.
Interface Specifications
Table 6-7 lists the specifications of the optical interfaces of the EFF8. Table 6-7 Performance specifications of the FE optical interface Item Optical interface type Specification Two-fiber bidirectional interface 100BASE-FX (15 km) Fiber type Working wavelength range (nm) Single-mode 1261 to 1360 100BASE-FX (40 km) Single-mode 1263 to 1360 100BASE-FX (80 km) Single-mode 1480 to 1580 Single-fiber bidirectional interface 100BASE-BX (10 km) Single-mode For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of 100BASE-BX optical interfaces and wavelength allocation. -15 to -8 100BASE-BX (40 km) Single-mode For details, see the following table, related optical module part number of 100BASE-BX optical interfaces and wavelength allocation. -5 to 0
Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-28
-34
-34
-28.2
-30
-8 8.2
-10 10
-10 10
-8 6.6
-10 10
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6-13
6 Interface Boards
Item Optical module part number
Specification 34060276 34060281 34060282 For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of 100BASE-BX optical interfaces and wavelength allocation. For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of 100BASE-BX optical interfaces and wavelength allocation.
Table 6-8 Related optical module part numbers of 100BASE-BX optical interfaces and wavelength allocation Item Optical module part number (15 km) Optical module part number (40 km) Transmitter wavelength (nm) Receiver wavelength (nm) 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1580 1480 to 1580 1260 to 1360 34060328 34060329 Local 34060363 Remote 34060364
Other Specifications
6.3 EFG2
This section describes the EFG2, a 2 x GE optical interface board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 6.3.1 Version Description The function version of the EFG2 is TN81. 6.3.2 Functions and Features The EFG2 is mainly used to access 2 x GE data services, and processes the services with the processing board EG16/EG8. 6.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
6 Interface Boards
The EFG2 consists of the interface conversion module, service processing module, management module, clock module and power supply module. 6.3.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the EFG2, there are indicators, a laser safety class label and interfaces. 6.3.5 Valid Slots The valid slots for the EFG2 vary with the slot housing the processing board. 6.3.6 Board Configuration Reference You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the EFG2. 6.3.7 Technical Specifications Specifications of the EFG2 cover specifications of interfaces, board dimensions, weight and power consumption.

The function version of the EFG2 is TN81.

The EFG2 is mainly used to access 2 x GE data services, and processes the services with the processing board EG16/EG8. Table 6-9 lists the functions and features of the EFG2. Table 6-9 Functions and Features of the EFG2 Function and Feature Basic function Interface function Description Service interface on the front panel Type of the loopback at the port Automatic releasing of the loopback at the port Port bandwidth utilization statistics Two GE interfaces. PHY layer inloop and outloop Supported. Supported.
Supports the inband DCN. The DCN function is enabled for the two ports by default, and can be manually enabled and disabled. Automatic laser shutdown LAG Supported. Inter-board Intra-board Back pressure Clock Supported Synchronous Ethernet Supported by the optical interfaces.
6-15
Supported. Supported.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6 Interface Boards
Description IEEE 1588 V2 protocol 1588 ACR clock Transmitting and receiving the synchronous status message (SSM) of synchronous Ethernet ports. Supported by the optical interfaces. Supported by the optical interfaces.

The EFG2 consists of the interface conversion module, service processing module, management module, clock module and power supply module. Figure 6-5 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the EFG2. Figure 6-5 Block diagram for the working principle of the EFG2
Backplane
2 x GE signals
Service signals
Management bus
Service signals
EG16
Management bus
Synchronous Ethernet clocks
IEEE 1588 V2 packets System clock Synchronous Ethernet clocks IEEE 1588 V2 packets
Management module
Management bus 3.3V
. . .
Clock module
EG16 EG16 EG16 EG16 PIU PIU
-48V/-60V
. . .
1.2V
Power module
-48V/-60V
NOTE
The processing board for the EFG2 is the EG16/EG8. The functional block diagram of the EG16 is considered as an example.

The service packets from the EG16/EG8 are accessed through the ports on the backplane of the EFG2, and then sent to the service processing module. The service processing module buffers and grooms the service packets, and sends the processing packets to the interface conversion module, which performs the coding/decoding and parallel/serial conversion on the service packets. Finally, the service signals are sent though the GE ports.

The GE services are accessed to the interface conversion module through the GE ports. The interface conversion module performs the coding/decoding and serial/parallel conversion, and
6 Interface Boards
then sends the packets to the service processing module, which buffers and grooms the service packets. Finally, the high speed packets are sent to the EG16/EG8 through the interface on the ports on the backplane.

This module performs the following functions: l In the upstream direction, this module accesses the GE services, and then performs the coding/decoding and serial/parallel conversion. Finally, the processing service packets are sent to the service processing module. In the downstream direction, this module receives the service packets sent by the service processing module, and performs the coding/decoding and serial/parallel conversion. Finally, the service packets are sent to each GE port.

This module performs the following functions: l In the upstream direction, this module receives the service packets sent by the interface conversion module, and buffers and grooms the service packets, and then sends the packets to the ports on the backplane. In the downstream direction, this module buffers and grooms the service packets sent through the ports on the backplane, and then sends the packets to the interface conversion module. Extracts and inserts synchronous Ethernet clock signals. Extracts and inserts IEEE 1588 V2 packets.
l l
Management Module
Clock Module
This module performs the following functions: l l l l Provides the working clocks for the modules on the boards. Supports the synchronous Ethernet. Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 protocol. Supports the 1588 ACR clock.
Power Supply Module

This module supplies 1.2 V and 3.3 V power for the board.
6.3.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the EFG2, there are indicators, a laser safety class label and interfaces.

Figure 6-6 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EFG2.
6 Interface Boards
Figure 6-6 Appearance of the front panel of the EFG2
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the EFG2. l l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status ACT indicator, green, which indicates the service activation status SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status L/A1, L/A2 indicators, green or orange, which indicate the port connection state or data transmission state.
6-18
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6 Interface Boards

Interface
On the EFG2, two SFP interfaces are present. Table 6-10 and Table 6-11 list the types and usage of the interfaces. For fiber corresponding to the interfaces, see 13.1.1 Types of Fiber. For cables corresponding to the interfaces, see 13.4.1 Straight Through Cable and 13.4.2 Crossover Cable. Table 6-10 Types and usage of the interfaces on the EFG2 Interface on the Front Panel Optical interfaces IN1-IN2 Interface Type LC Usage When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input interface for the GE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is not used. OUT1-OUT2 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an output interface for the GE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input/output interface for the GE optical signal. Electrical interfaces OUT1 IN1-OUT2 IN2 RJ-45 Input/Output interfaces for GE electrical signals For the pins for the GE electrical interface, see Table 6-11.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6-19
6 Interface Boards
87654321
3 4 5 6 7 8
6.3.5 Valid Slots

The valid slots for the EFG2 vary with the slot housing the processing board. In the case of the OptiX PTN 3900, the EFG2 can be housed in any of slots 19 to 26 and slots 31 to 38 in the interface area. The EFG2 accesses and processes the Ethernet services when used together with the EG16 or the EG8. For the slot mapping relations of the EFG2 and the EG16 or of the EFG2 and the EG8, see Table 5-4 or Table 5-20 .

You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the EFG2. You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the EFG2. l l Ethernet Interface Automatic Laser Shutdown

Specifications of the EFG2 cover specifications of interfaces, board dimensions, weight and power consumption. Table 6-12 lists the specifications of interfaces on the EFG2.
6-20
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6 Interface Boards
Table 6-12 Technical specifications of the GE optical interface Item Optical interface type Specification Two-fiber bidirectional interface Single-fiber bidirectional interface 1000BASEZX (80 km) Single-mode 1500 to 1580 1000BASECWDM (80 km) Single-mode For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of 1000BASECWDM optical interfaces and wavelength allocation. 0 to 5 1000BASEBX (10 km) Single-mode For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of 1000BASEBX optical interfaces and wavelength allocation. -9 to -3
-9.5 to 0
-11 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to 5
-17
-19
-22
-22
-28
-19.5
-3
-3
-3
-9
-3
8.2
34060286
34060473
34060298
34060360
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6-21
6 Interface Boards
Item
Specification
1 2 3 4
1464.5 to 1477.5 1484.5 to 1497.5 1504.5 to 1517.5 1524.5 to 1537.5
5 6 7 8
1544.5 to 1557.5 1564.5 to 1577.5 1584.5 to 1597.5 1604.5 to 1617.5
Table 6-15 Specifications of the electrical interfaces on the EFG2 Item Interface rate RJ-45 electrical interface specification Specification Requirement 1000 Mbit/s Complies with IEEE 802.3 and enterprise regulations.
6-22
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6 Interface Boards
6.4 EFG4
This section describes the EFG4, a 4 x GE optical interface board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, configuration reference, and technical specifications. 6.4.1 Version Description The function version of the EFG4 is TN81. 6.4.2 Functions and Features When used with the processing board EG8, the EFG4 accesses 4 channels of GE optical/electrical data services. 6.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The EFG4 mainly consists of the service access module, management module, clock module, and power supply module. 6.4.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the EFG4, there are indicators and interfaces. 6.4.5 Valid Slots The slots for the EFG4 in the interface area map the slots for the processing board. 6.4.6 Board Configuration Reference You can configure the EFG4 on the U2000. 6.4.7 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the EFG4 cover the interface specifications, board dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

The function version of the EFG4 is TN81.

When used with the processing board EG8, the EFG4 accesses 4 channels of GE optical/electrical data services. Table 6-16 lists the functions and features of the EFG4.
NOTE
The EFG4 can implement the loopback, back pressure, and clock functions only when used with the EG8.
Table 6-16 Functions and features of the EFG4 Function and Feature Basic functions Interface function
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Remarks Service interfaces on the front panel Loopback type at a port Four GE interfaces MAC-layer inloop and outloop
6-23
6 Interface Boards
Remarks Automatic loopback release at a port Port MTU Port bandwidth utilization statistics Supported Supported Supported
Inband DCN function. You can manually enable/disable the function. By default, all ports are enabled with the DCN function. Automatic laser shutdown Link aggregation group (LAG) Clock function Supported Intra-board LAG Inter-board LAG Synchronous Ethernet Transmitting and receiving of SSMs at a synchronous Ethernet interface IEEE 1588V2 protocol IEEE 1588V2 ACR clock
NOTE The GE interface on the front panel can function as either an optical interface or an electrical interface. When the GE interface functions as an electrical interface, it only supports the 1000 Mbit/s full- duplex working mode. The remote interface should also be set to 1000 Mbit/s full- duplex working mode.
Supported Supported Supported by optical interfaces Supported by optical interfaces
Supported by optical interfaces

The EFG4 mainly consists of the service access module, management module, clock module, and power supply module. Figure 6-7 shows the functional block diagram of the EFG4. Figure 6-7 Functional block diagram of the EFG4
Service signal Backplane EG8 Management bus
4 x GE signals
Service access module
Management bus
Management module
EG8
Working clock 3.3 V 1.2 V -48 V/-60 V -48 V/-60 V
Clock module
Power supply module
PIU PIU
6-24
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6 Interface Boards
Transmit Direction
In the transmit direction, the EFG4 receives service signals from the EG8, and then transparently transmits the service signals through the service interface on the front panel.
Receive Direction
In the receive direction, the EFG4 accesses four channels of service signals through the service interface on the front panel, and then transparently transmits the service signals to the EG8.
Service Access Module

This module mainly has the following functions: l In the receive direction, this module accesses 4 channels of GE service signals through the interface on the front panel, performs O/E conversion, and transparently transmits the service signals to the EG8. In the transmit direction, this module receives the service signals from the EG8, performs E/O conversion, and outputs the signals through the service interface on the front panel. The clock information in the GE service signals is transparently transmitted with the service packets. When used with the EG8, the EFG4 supports the synchronous Ethernet, 1588 ACR clock, and IEEE 1588V2 protocol.
l l
Management Module
When used with the EG8, this module implements the management control function for the EFG4.
Clock Module
This module provides the working clock for the management module.
Power Supply Module

The power supply module on the EFG4 provides power for the EFG4 by accessing -48 V/-60 V power supply.
6.4.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the EFG4, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 6-8 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EFG4.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6-25
6 Interface Boards
Figure 6-8 Appearance of the front panel of the EFG4
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the EFG4. l l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the board status ACT indicator, green, which indicates that the service is activated SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status L/A1-L/A4 indicators, green or orange, which indicate the port connection and data transmitting/receiving status
For details on indications of the indicators, see A.2 Board Indicators.
6-26
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6 Interface Boards
Interfaces
Four SFP interfaces are present on the EFG4. Table 6-17 lists the number, types, and usage of the interfaces. For the fibers used at the interfaces, see 13.1.1 Types of Fiber. For the cables used at the interfaces, see 13.4.1 Straight Through Cable and 13.4.2 Crossover Cable. Table 6-17 Types and usage of the interfaces on the EFG4 Interface on the Front Panel Optical interfaces IN1-IN4 Interface Type LC Usage When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input interface for the GE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is not used. OUT1-OUT4 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an output interface for the GE optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input/output interface for the GE optical signal. Electrical interfaces OUT1 IN1OUT4 IN4 RJ-45 Input/Output interfaces for GE electrical signals For the pins for the GE electrical interface, see Table 6-18.
87654321
3 4 5 6 7 8
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6-27
6 Interface Boards
6.4.5 Valid Slots

The slots for the EFG4 in the interface area map the slots for the processing board. In the case of the OptiX PTN 3900, the EFG4 can be housed in any of slots 19-26 and 31-38. When used with the processing board, the EFG4 accesses and processes Ethernet services. For the mapping relation between the slots for the EFG4 and the slots for the EG8, see Table 5-20.

You can configure the EFG4 on the U2000. You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters of the EFG4. l l Ethernet interfaces Automatic laser shutdown

The technical specifications of the EFG4 cover the interface specifications, board dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 6-19 lists the specifications of the optical interfaces on the EFG4, and Table 6-22 lists the specifications of the electrical interfaces on the EFG4. Table 6-19 Technical specifications of the GE optical interface Item Optical interface type Specification Two-fiber bidirectional interface Single-fiber bidirectional interface 1000BASEZX (80 km) Single-mode 1500 to 1580 1000BASECWDM (80 km) Single-mode For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of 1000BASECWDM optical interfaces and wavelength allocation. 1000BASEBX (10 km) Single-mode For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of 1000BASEBX optical interfaces and wavelength allocation.
6-28
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6 Interface Boards
Item Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Optical module part number
Specification -9.5 to 0 -11 to -3 -5 to 0 -2 to 5 0 to 5 -9 to -3
-17
-19
-22
-22
-28
-19.5
-3
-3
-3
-9
-3
8.2
34060286
34060473
34060298
34060360
1 2 3 4
1464.5 to 1477.5 1484.5 to 1497.5 1504.5 to 1517.5 1524.5 to 1537.5
5 6 7 8
1544.5 to 1557.5 1564.5 to 1577.5 1584.5 to 1597.5 1604.5 to 1617.5
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6-29
6 Interface Boards
Table 6-22 Specifications of the electrical interfaces on the EFG4 Item Interface rate RJ-45 electrical interface specification Specification Requirement 1000 Mbit/s Complies with IEEE 802.3 and enterprise regulations.
6.5 POD41
This section describes the POD41, a 2 x 622M/155M POS interface board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 6.5.1 Version Description The function version of the POD41 is TN81. 6.5.2 Functions and Features The POD41 mainly accesses 2 x STM-4/STM-1 services. The POD41 should be used with the processing board EG16/EG8. 6.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The POD41 mainly consists of the interface conversion module, service processing module, management module, power supply module, and clock module. 6.5.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the POD41, there are indicators, a laser safety class l label and interfaces. 6.5.5 Valid Slots The slot that houses the POD41 in the interface area is determined by the slot that houses the processing board used with the POD41. 6.5.6 Board Configuration Reference You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the POD41. 6.5.7 Technical Specifications
6 Interface Boards
Specifications of the POD41 board cover specifications of interfaces, board dimensions, weight and power consumption.

The function version of the POD41 is TN81.

The POD41 mainly accesses 2 x STM-4/STM-1 services. The POD41 should be used with the processing board EG16/EG8. Table 6-23 lists the following functions and features of the POD41. Table 6-23 Functions and Features of the POD41 Function and Feature Basic function Interface function Description Service interface on the front panel Type of the loopback at the port Automatic releasing of the loopback at the port Automatic laser shutdown Port bandwidth utilization statistics Two STM-1/STM-4 optical interfaces Inloop Outloop Supported. Supported. Supported.
Supports the inband DCN. The DCN function is enabled for the two ports by default, and can be manually enabled and disabled. Used as the NNI. LMSP protection Clock Supports the 1+1 LMSP and 1:1 LMSP protection. The protection switching time is less than 50 ms. Recovers the line clocks

The POD41 mainly consists of the interface conversion module, service processing module, management module, power supply module, and clock module. Figure 6-9 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the POD41.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6-31
6 Interface Boards
Figure 6-9 Block diagram for the working principle of the POD41
Backplane
2 x STM-1/STM-4 signals
Service signals
Management bus

Line clocks
Service signals
EG16
Management bus
Management module
Management bus
Clock module
System clock Line clocks
EG16 EG16 EG16
3.3V
. . .
. . .
1.2V
Power supply module
-48V/-60V -48V/-60V
PIU PIU
NOTE
The processing board for the POD41 is the EG16/EG8. The functional block diagram of the EG16 is considered as an example.

This module converts rates of interfaces.

This module converts the STM-4 or STM-1 serial differential signals to parallel signals, and outputs the parallel signals through the interfaces. In addition, this module sends the frame alarm signals, received alarm signals and inserted signals indicating bit error found during the parity check. Finally, this module reports its status through the management module.
Management Module
Power supply module

This module provides DC voltages required by each module on the board.
Clock Module
This module locks the phase for the system clock and provides the line clock.
6.5.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the POD41, there are indicators, a laser safety class l label and interfaces.

Figure 6-10 shows the appearance of the front panel of the POD41.
6 Interface Boards
Figure 6-10 Appearance of the front panel of the POD41
Indicator
l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status ACT indicator, green, which indicates the service activation status SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status

6 Interface Boards
Interface
Two SFP interfaces are present on the front panel of the POD41. Table 6-24 lists the types and usage of the interfaces. For fiber corresponding to the interfaces, see 13.1.1 Types of Fiber. Table 6-24 Types and usage of the interfaces on the POD41 Interface on the Front Panel IN1-IN2 Interface Type LC Usage
When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input interface for the STM-1/STM-4 optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is not used.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an output interface for the STM-1/STM-4 optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input/output interface for the STM-1 optical signal. The STM-4 interface does not support the single-fiber bidirectional optical module.
6.5.5 Valid Slots

The slot that houses the POD41 in the interface area is determined by the slot that houses the processing board used with the POD41. For the OptiX PTN 3900, the POD41 can be housed in any of slots 19 to 26 and slots 31 to 38 in the interface area. When used with the EG16 or the EG8, the POD41 can access and process STM-1/STM-4 line signals. For the slot mapping relations of the POD41 and the EG16 or of the POD41 and the EG8, see Table 5-4 or Table 5-20 .

You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the POD41. You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the POD41.
6 Interface Boards
l l l l l
Automatic Laser Shutdown J0 J1 C2 SDH Interface

Specifications of the POD41 board cover specifications of interfaces, board dimensions, weight and power consumption. Table 6-25 and Table 6-27 list the specifications of interfaces on the POD41. Table 6-25 Technical specifications of the STM-1 optical interface Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Optical interface type Specification 155520 Two-fiber bidirectional interface S-1.1 (15 km) Fiber type Working wavelength range (nm) Single-mode 1261 to 1360 L-1.1 (40 km) Single-mode 1263 to 1360 L-1.2 (80 km) Single-mode 1480 to 1580 Single-fiber bidirectional interface S-1.1 (10 km) Single-mode For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of single-fiber bidirectional optical interface and wavelength allocation. -15 to -8 L-1.1 (40 km) Single-mode For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of single-fiber bidirectional optical interface and wavelength allocation. -5 to 0
Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-28
-34
-34
-28.2
-30
-8 8.2
-10 10
-10 10
-8 6.6
-10 10
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6-35
6 Interface Boards
Item Optical module part number
Specification 34060276 34060281 34060282 For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of single-fiber bidirectional optical interface and wavelength allocation. For details, see the following table, related optical module part number of single-fiber bidirectional optical interface and wavelength allocation.
Table 6-27 Technical specifications of the STM-4 optical interface Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Optical interface type Specification 622080 Two-fiber bidirectional interface S-4.1 (15 km) Fiber type Working wavelength range (nm) Launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Single-mode 1261 to 1360 -15 to -8 -28 -8 L-4.1 (40 km) Single-mode 1280 to 1355 -3 to 2 -28 -8 L-4.2 (80 km) Single-mode 1480 to 1580 -3 to 2 -28 -8
6-36
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6 Interface Boards
Item Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Optical module code
Specification 8.2 34060277 10 34060280 10 34060284
6.6 AFO1
This section describes the AFO1, an 8-channel ATM STM-1 service interface board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications. 6.6.1 Version Description The function version of the AFO1 is TN81. 6.6.2 Functions and Features The AFO1 is used to access 8 x ATM STM-1 services. When used with the processing board EG16/EG8, the AFO1 can process the ATM services. 6.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The AFO1 mainly consists of the ATM access module, ATM processing module, data processing module, management module, clock module, and power supply module. 6.6.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the AFO1, there are indicators and eight optical interfaces. 6.6.5 Valid Slots The slot that houses the AFO1 in the interface area is determined by the slot that houses the processing board used with the AFO1. 6.6.6 Board Configuration Reference You can use the U2000 to set parameters for the AFO1. 6.6.7 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the AFO1 cover the interface specifications, board dimensions, weight and power consumption.

The function version of the AFO1 is TN81.

The AFO1 is used to access 8 x ATM STM-1 services. When used with the processing board EG16/EG8, the AFO1 can process the ATM services.
6 Interface Boards
Table 6-28 lists the functions and features of the AFO1. Table 6-28 Functions and Features of the AFO1 Function and Feature Basic function Interface function Description Service interface on the front panel Automatic shutdown of the laser at the port Type of the loopback at the port Automatic releasing of the loopback at the port ATM Supported traffic type Eight ATM STM-1 optical interfaces Supported. Inloop Outloop Supported. CBR UBR UBR+ rt-VBR nrt-VBR Number of supported PW Number of supported ATM VP/VC switching connections 4k 8k
Supports the encapsulation from ATM VPC/VCC to PWE3 in the Nto-1 (N32) and 1-to-1 formats. Supports the PW encapsulation for the ATM cells in the concatenation and non-concatenation formats. The number of PW connections that support the cell concatenation is 2 k, and the maximum number of concatenated cells is 31. UNI-side ATM OAM Supports the CC test. Supports the LB test. Supports the AIS. Supports the RDI. LMSP protection Supports the LMSP. The protection switching time is less than 50 ms. l Supports the inter-board and intra-board 1+1 LMSP. l Supports the intra-board 1:1 LMSP. l AFO1s that work with different processing boards can support the inter-board 1:1 LMSP. l Supports one group of intra-board 1:N (N7) LMSP.
6-38
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6 Interface Boards
Function and Feature Extraction and insertion of S1 bytes
Description Supported.

The AFO1 mainly consists of the ATM access module, ATM processing module, data processing module, management module, clock module, and power supply module. Figure 6-11 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the AFO1. Figure 6-11 Block diagram for the working principle of the AFO1
Backplane 8 x STM-1 ATM signals
ATM access module
ATM cells
ATM processing module
ATM cells
Service signals EG16
Management bus
Management bus
Management module
EG16
Clock module
3.3 V . . . 1.1 V . . .
System clock signals
EG16
Power supply module
-48 V/-60 V -48 V/-60 V
PIU PIU
NOTE
The processing board for the AFO1 is the EG16/EG8. The functional block diagram of the EG16 is considered as an example.
In the upstream Direction

The ATM STM-1 service signals accesses the ATM access module through the optical interface. The ATM access module extracts the ATM cells, and transmits the cells to the ATM processing module for service processing. Then, QoS functions such as VP/VC switching, ATM OAM, and traffic management are performed on the cells. The PW encapsulation is performed on the processed cells on the data processing module. Finally, the cells are transmitted to the processing board EG16/EG8 through the port on the backplane.
In the downstream Direction

The data services are accessed to the processing module through the port on the backplane. The PW decapsulation is performed on the services, and then the services are sent to the ATM
6 Interface Boards
processing module. On the ATM processing module, QoS functions such as ATM OAM and traffic management are performed on the services. Then, the services are sent to the ATM access module, where the TAM cells are mapped to SDH signals. Then, the signals are sent out through the corresponding optical interface.
ATM Access Module

This module performs the following functions: l In the upstream direction, the SDH overheads, alarms, and pointers are processed on the accessed 8 x ATM STM-1 signals at a rate of 155 Mbit/s. The ATM cells are extracted from the SDH signals, and then the ATM cells are sent to the ATM processing module, where the line clock is extracted. In the downstream direction, the ATM cells from the ATM processing module are mapped to the SDH signals, and then the SDH overhead processing, alarm processing, and pointer processing are performed on the signals. In this manner, the SDH frames are formed.
ATM Processing Module

This module mainly realizes the VP/VC switching, QoS functions such as traffic management, traffic shaping, queue scheduling, and OAM function for the ATM cells. l In the upstream direction, this module determines the traffic priority of the ATM cells. If congestion occurs, this module determines whether to discard the cells or to continue transmitting cells according to the traffic priority. If the cells are continued to be transmitted, the VP/VC switching is performed on the cells, which are then sent to the data processing module. In the downstream direction, this module processes the cell packet headers, and performs the VP/VC switching on the cells. If congestion occurs, this module determines whether to discard the cells or to continue transmitting cells according to the traffic priority. If the cells are continued to be transmitted, they are sent to the ATM access module. Provides the back pressure mechanism, and realizes the traffic management function. Supports the F4 and F5 ATM OAM functions: Supports the CC test. Supports the LB test.
l l

This module mainly realizes the PW encapsulation and decapsulation for the packets. l In the upstream direction, this module receives the ATM cells, and performs the PW encapsulation for the cells in the concatenation or non-concatenation format. Then, the cells are sent to the processing board EG16/EG8 through the port on the backplane. In the downstream direction, this module receives the PWE3 packets from the port on the backplane, identifies the packets, performs the PW decapsulation to obtain the ATM cells, and then transmits the cells to the ATM processing module.
Management Module
This module performs the following functions: l
6-40
Manages and controls other modules on the board.

6 Interface Boards
Processes various clock signals when used with the clock module.
Clock Module
This module provides clock signals for other modules of the board.
Power Supply Module

This module provides the working power supply for each module of the board.
6.6.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AFO1, there are indicators and eight optical interfaces.

Figure 6-12 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AFO1. Figure 6-12 Front panel of the AFO1
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6-41
6 Interface Boards
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AFO1: l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status ACT indicator, green, which indicates the service activation status SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status
Interfaces
Eight SFP interfaces are present on the AFO1. Table 6-29 lists the number, types, and usage of the interfaces on the AFO1. For fiber corresponding to the interfaces, see 13.1.1 Types of Fiber. Table 6-29 Types and usage of the interfaces on the AFO1 Interface on the Front Panel IN1 - IN8 Interface Type LC Usage When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input interface for the STM-1 optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is not used. OUT1 - OUT8 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an output interface for the STM-1 optical signal. When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, this interface is used as an input/output interface for the STM-1 optical signal.
6.6.5 Valid Slots

The slot that houses the AFO1 in the interface area is determined by the slot that houses the processing board used with the AFO1. In the case of the OptiX PTN 3900, the AFO1 can be housed in any of slots 19 to 26 and slots 31 to 38 in the interface area. The AFO1 accesses and processes the ATM STM-1 services when used together with the EG16 or the EG8.
6 Interface Boards
For the slot mapping relations of the AFO1 and the EG16 or of the AFO1 and the EG8, see Table 5-4 or Table 5-20 .

You can use the U2000 to set parameters for the AFO1. You can use the U2000 to set the following parameters for the AFO1: l l Automatic laser shutdown SDH interface

The technical specifications of the AFO1 cover the interface specifications, board dimensions, weight and power consumption.
Interface Specifications
Table 6-30 lists the specifications of interfaces on the AFO1. Table 6-30 Technical specifications of the STM-1 optical interface Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Optical interface type Specification 155520 Two-fiber bidirectional interface S-1.1 (15 km) Fiber type Working wavelength range (nm) Single-mode 1261 to 1360 L-1.1 (40 km) Single-mode 1263 to 1360 L-1.2 (80 km) Single-mode 1480 to 1580 Single-fiber bidirectional interface S-1.1 (10 km) Single-mode For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of single-fiber bidirectional optical interface and wavelength allocation. -15 to -8 L-1.1 (40 km) Single-mode For details, see the following table, related optical module part numbers of single-fiber bidirectional optical interface and wavelength allocation. -5 to 0
Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-28
-34
-34
-28.2
-30
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6-43
6 Interface Boards
Item Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Optical module part number
Specification -8 8.2 -10 10 -10 10 -8 6.6 -10 10
34060276
34060281
34060282
Other Specifications
6.7 D75/D12
This section describes the D75/D12, a 32 x E1 75-ohm interface board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications.
NOTE
6 Interface Boards
The mapping impedance of an interface on the D75 is 75 ohm, and the mapping impedance of an interface on the D12 is 120 ohm. Except the difference of mapping impedance, the functions and features of the D75 and D12 are the same.
6.7.1 Version Description The function version of the D75/D12 is TN81. 6.7.2 Functions and Features The D75 is mainly used to input and output 32 x 75-ohm E1 signals, and the D12 is mainly used to input and output 32 x 120-ohm E1 signals. Used with the MD1 or MQ1, the D75/D12 provides TPS protection for E1 services. 6.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The D75/D12 mainly consists of the isolation protection module, relay trail selecting module and power supply module. 6.7.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the D75/D12, there are interfaces. 6.7.5 Valid Slots The slot that houses the D75/D12 in the interface area is determined by the slot that houses the processing board used with the D75/D12. 6.7.6 Board Configuration Reference You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the D75/D12. 6.7.7 Technical Specifications Specifications of the D75/D12 board cover interface specifications, board dimensions, weight and power consumption.

The function version of the D75/D12 is TN81.

The D75 is mainly used to input and output 32 x 75-ohm E1 signals, and the D12 is mainly used to input and output 32 x 120-ohm E1 signals. Used with the MD1 or MQ1, the D75/D12 provides TPS protection for E1 services. The D75/D12 board supports the inband DCN, which can be manually enabled and disabled. The DCN function is enabled for the first and seventeenth ports by default. The interfaces on the front panel of the D75/D12 supports the inloop and the outloop.

The D75/D12 mainly consists of the isolation protection module, relay trail selecting module and power supply module. Figure 6-13 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the D75/D12.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6-45
6 Interface Boards
Figure 6-13 Block diagram for the working principle of the D75/D12
Backplane
E1 signal E1 signal
Thunder -proof unit
Transformer
Impedance matching unit
Relay trail selecting module
Working processing board Protection processing board
E1 signal
Isolation protection module Power supply module
3.3 V
Fuse
3.3 V power supply
Isolation Protection Module

This module mainly consists of the thunder-proof unit, transformer and impedance matching unit. The thunder-proof unit mainly protects circuits against transient anomalies, such as overcurrent and lightning. The transformer uses the isolation feature to isolate the common mode interference, and thus protects the board against the common mode interference. The impedance matching unit ensures that the impedances in the transmit and receive directions match with the internal impedance.
Relay Trail Selecting Module

This module realizes the TPS protection for interface boards according to the control signals sent by the system control board.
Power Supply Module

This module provides DC voltages required by each module on the board.
6.7.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the D75/D12, there are interfaces.

Figure 6-14 shows the appearances of the front panel of the D75/D12.
6-46
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6 Interface Boards
Figure 6-14 Appearances of the front panel of the D75 and D12
Interface
On the D75/D12, four DB44 interfaces are present. Table 6-32 lists the types and usage of the interfaces. For cables corresponding to the 75-ohm interfaces, see 13.3.2 75-ohm 8 x E1 Cable, and for cables corresponding to the 120-ohm interfaces, see 13.3.3 120-ohm 8 x E1 Cable.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6-47
6 Interface Boards
Table 6-32 Interfaces on the D75/D12 Interfac e on the Front Panel 1-8 Interfac e Type Usage D75 75-ohm interface, which is used to transmit or receive the first to eighth channels of E1 services. 75-ohm interface, which is used to transmit or receive the ninth to sixteenth channels of E1 services. 75-ohm interface, which is used to transmit or receive the seventeenth to twenty-fourth channels of E1 services. 75-ohm interface, which is used to transmit or receive the twentyfifth to thirty-second channels of E1 services. D12 120-ohm interface, which is used to transmit or receive the first to eighth channels of E1 services. 120-ohm interface, which is used to transmit or receive the ninth to sixteenth channels of E1 services. 120-ohm interface, which is used to transmit or receive the seventeenth to twenty-fourth channels of E1 services. 120-ohm interface, which is used to transmit or receive the twentyfifth to thirty-second channels of E1 services.
DB44
9-16
DB44
17-24
DB44
25-32
DB44
For details on the pins of the 75-ohm DB44 interfaces, see Table 6-33. For details on the pins of the 120-ohm DB44 interfaces, see Table 6-34. Table 6-33 Pins of the 75-ohm DB44 interfaces Front View
44
Pin 38 23 37 22 36
Usage Grounding end Receive end Grounding end Receive end Grounding end Receive end Grounding end Receive end Grounding end Receive end Grounding end Receive end
Remarks R1
Pin 15 30
Usage Grounding end Transmit end Grounding end Transmit end Grounding end Transmit end Grounding end Transmit end Grounding end Transmit end Grounding end Transmit end
Remarks T1
R2
14 29
T2
R3
13 28
T3
21 35 20 34 19 33 18
R4
12 27
T4
R5
11 26
T5
R6
10 25
T6
6-48
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6 Interface Boards
Front View
Pin 32 17 31 16
Usage Grounding end Receive end Grounding end Receive end
Remarks R7
Pin 9 24
Usage Grounding end Transmit end Grounding end Transmit end
Remarks T7
R8
8 7
T8
Table 6-34 Pins of the 120-ohm DB44 interfaces Front View

44
Pin 38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 34 19 33 18 32 17
Usage Negative receive end Positive receive end Negative receive end Positive receive end Negative receive end Positive receive end Negative receive end Positive receive end Negative receive end Positive receive end Negative receive end Positive receive end Negative receive end Positive receive end
Remarks R1
Pin 15 30
Usage Negative transmit end Positive transmit end Negative transmit end Positive transmit end Negative transmit end Positive transmit end Negative transmit end Positive transmit end Negative transmit end Positive transmit end Negative transmit end Positive transmit end Negative transmit end Positive transmit end
Remarks T1
R2
14 29
T2
R3
13 28
T3
R4
12 27
T4
R5
11 26
T5
R6
10 25
T6
R7
9 24
T7
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6-49
6 Interface Boards
Front View
Pin 31 16
Usage Negative receive end Positive receive end
Remarks R8
Pin 8 7
Usage Negative transmit end Positive transmit end
Remarks T8
6.7.5 Valid Slots

The slot that houses the D75/D12 in the interface area is determined by the slot that houses the processing board used with the D75/D12. For the OptiX PTN 3900, the D75/D12 can be housed in any of slots 19 to 26 and slots 31 to 38 in the interface area to input and output 32 x E1 signals.
NOTE
When used with the MD1, the D75/D12 can be only housed in any of slot 19, slot 21, slot 23, slot 25, slot 31, slot 33, slot 35 and slot 37. When the D75/D12 is housed in slot 20, slot 22, slot 24, slot 26, slot 32, slot 34, slot 36 and slot 38, the last port is not available.
For details on the processing board for the D75/D12, refer to Table 3-2.

You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the D75/D12. You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the D75/D12. l E1 Interface

Specifications of the D75/D12 board cover interface specifications, board dimensions, weight and power consumption. Table 6-35 lists the interface specifications of the D75/D12. Table 6-35 Interface specifications of the D75/D12 Item Nominal bit rate: (kbit/s) Interface impedance (ohm) Specification 2048 75 (D75) 120 (D12) Code Pulse shape at output port
6-50
HDB3 Compliant with ITU-T G.703

Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6 Interface Boards
Item Attenuation tolerance of input interface at 1024 kHz frequency point (dB) Anti-interference capability of input port Input jitter tolerance Output jitter
Specification 0 to 6 Compliant with ITU-T G.703 Compliant with ITU-T G.823 Compliant with ITU-T G.823
Board dimensions (mm): 261.4 (H) x 156.9 (D) x 22.0 (W) Weight of the D75 (kg): 0.57 Weight of the D12 (kg): 0.56 Power consumption (W): 0.1
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
6-51
7 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
About This Chapter

For the OptiX PTN 3900, the system control, communication and auxiliary processing board is the SCA, and the cross-connect board is the XCS. 7.1 TN81SCA This section describes the TN81SCA, a system control, communication and auxiliary processing board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 7.2 TN82SCA This section describes the TN82SCA, a system control, communication and auxiliary processing board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 7.3 TN81XCS This section describes the TN81XCS, a general cross-connect and timing board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 7.4 TN82XCS This section describes the TN82XCS, a general cross-connect and timing board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 7.5 TN83XCS This section describes the TN83XCS, an enhanced cross-connect and clock board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
7-1
7.1 TN81SCA
This section describes the TN81SCA, a system control, communication and auxiliary processing board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 7.1.1 Version Description The function version of the TN81SCA is TN81. 7.1.2 Functions and Features The TN81SCA is used to perform the synchronous equipment management function (SEMF) and message communication function (MCF), and to process the system protocol packets. 7.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TN81SCA mainly consist of the system control module, system communication module, auxiliary processing module, and power supply module. 7.1.4 Jumper On the TN81SCA, there are jumpers, which are used to set the running state for the board. 7.1.5 Front Panel On the front panel of the TN81SCA, there are indicators, buttons and interfaces. 7.1.6 Valid Slots The TN81SCA can be housed in any of slots 29 - 30 of the subrack. 7.1.7 Board Configuration Reference You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the TN81SCA. 7.1.8 Technical Specifications Specifications of the TN81SCA board cover board dimensions, weight and power consumption.

The function version of the TN81SCA is TN81.
NOTE
The SCA has two function versions, that is, TN81 and TN82. The differences between the two versions are as follows: l The performance of the TN82SCA is improved, and the specifications of the TN82SCA are changed. In this document, the TN81SCA and TN82SCA are referred to as the SCA, unless otherwise specified.

The TN81SCA is used to perform the synchronous equipment management function (SEMF) and message communication function (MCF), and to process the system protocol packets. The TN81SCA board supports the following functions and features: l l l l
7-2
System control Communication Auxiliary processing Board 1+1 protection


The TN81SCA mainly consist of the system control module, system communication module, auxiliary processing module, and power supply module. Figure 7-1 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the TN81SCA. Figure 7-1 Block diagram for the working principle of the TN81SCA
Backplane ALMI1 ALMI2 ALMO1 LAMP1 LAMP2 PIU FAN
Auxiliary processing module
Working/protection Management bus
Another SCA Another SCA
System control module
Working/protection backup bus
ETH EXT F&f
System communication module
Communication bus Other boards
5 .V
. .
1.2 V
. . .
Power supply module
-48 V/-60 V Fuse -48 V/-60 V
PIU PIU
System Control Module

This module performs the following functions. l l l l l Manages and configures the entire NE and boards housed in the NE. Collects data on alarms and performance. Processes protocol packets. Backups important data. The working and protection TN81SCA monitor status of each other. If the working SCA fails, the system control module controls the switching and realizes 1+1 protection for the SCA.
System Communication Module

This module performs the following functions.
l l
Integrates with an Ethernet switching module, which is used to perform non-blocking switching of packets from each board. Provides one 10M/100M Ethernet interface to connect to the U2000.In the case of connection to the PC, use the cross-over network cable. In the case of connection to the switch or hub, use the straight through network cable. Provides one 10M/100M autosensing Ethernet interface for communication with the extended subrack. Provides an F&f interface, which is used to connect the TN81SCA to a PC or workstation.
l l
Auxiliary Processing Module

This module performs the following functions. l l l l l l Monitors the status of the PIU and the status of the system power supply accessed from the PIU. Monitors the status of the fan board, provide fan alarms and manage fans. Provides one interface for 4 x cabinet alarm indicators output. Provides one interface for 4 x cabinet alarm indicators concatenation. Provides two interfaces for 8 x alarm input. Provides one interface for 2 x alarm output and 2 x alarm concatenation.
Power Supply Module

This module converts the DC voltage provided by the PIU board into the voltage that is required by each module of the SCA board.
7.1.4 Jumper
On the TN81SCA, there are jumpers, which are used to set the running state for the board.
CAUTION
Do not change the default setting of the jumpers. Otherwise, the board may become faulty. Figure 7-2 shows where J1013, J1010, J20, J23, J22, and J21 are located on the SCA. l l l J1013, for which the silk screen on the PCB is WE. J1010, for which the silk screen on the PCB is RTC. J20, J23, J22, and J21, which are used to debug the software. They correspond to DEBUG3DEBUG0, which form a line in the left-to-right order and indicate a four-bit binary numeral. The most left one bit of this binary numeral is the high bit. Refer to Table 7-2.
7-4
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Figure 7-2 Jumpers on the TN81SCA

J21 J22 J23 J20 POWER
CPU
1 2 3
J1013
J1010
Table 7-1 lists details on the jumpers on the TN81SCA. Table 7-1 Jumpers on the TN81SCA Jumper J1010 Function Enable the battery. Description The jumper cap is inserted in 1-2 by default, the battery is enabled. In this manner, the real-time clock does not lost after the board is powered off. When this jumper is not capped, the BIOS cannot be written. When this jumper is capped, the BIOS can be written. J20, J23, J22, J21 Set the running state of the board. If the jumper is not capped, the corresponding bit is "0". If the jumper is capped, the corresponding bit is "1". The bits form a line in the high-to-low order and indicate a four-bit binary numeral. The most left one bit of this binary numeral is the high bit. See Table 7-2.
J1013
Enable the writing on the BIOS.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
7-5
Table 7-2 J20, J23, J22, and J21 jumpers DEB UG3 DEB UG2 DEB UG1 DEB UG0 Corres pondi ng Value 0000 0011 0100 0101 0110 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Description
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Indicates the running state, the default state, where the watchdog is enabled. Indicates the debugging state. Indicates the running state where the watchdog is disabled. Indicates the maintenance state. Indicates the emulation running state. Erases the database. Erases the NE software (patch included). Erases the database and NE software (patch included). Erases the database, NE software and NE.ini file. Erases the extended BIOS and system parameter field in the file system and FLASH memory. Recovers the system parameter field as default.
1010
7.1.5 Front Panel

On the front panel of the TN81SCA, there are indicators, buttons and interfaces.

Figure 7-3 shows the appearance of the front panel of the TN81SCA.
7-6
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Figure 7-3 Appearance of the front panel of the TN81SCA
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the TN81SCA. l
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status
l l l
PROG indicator, red or green, which indicates the running status of the program SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status ACT indicator, green, which indicates the board active/standby status
Board reset button

As shown inFigure 7-3, the reset button is marked as RESET on the front panel of the board. The RESET button is used for cold reset of the TN81SCA.
Interface
Table 7-3 lists the types and usage of the interfaces of the TN81SCA. Table 7-3 Types and usage of the interfaces on the TN81SCA Interface on the Front Panel LAMP1 LAMP2 ETH Interface Type RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 Usage Interface for outputting cabinet indicators Interface for concatenating cabinet indicators 10M/100M Ethernet interface for connecting to the NMS. In the case of connection to the PC, use the cross-over network cable. In the case of connection to the switch or hub, use the straight through network cable. 10M/100M autosensing Ethernet interface using as an NMS concatenation interface (used with the straight through network calbe). Common interface for 2 x alarm outputs and 2 x alarm concatenations Interface for inputting the first to fourth channels of alarms Interface for inputting the fifth to eighth channels of alarms OAM interface
EXT
RJ-45
ALMO1 ALMI1 ALMI2 F&f
RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45
NOTE
If 1+1 protection is configured for the TN81SCA on the equipment, you can use the interface of either the TN81SCA. The interface on the TN81SCA housed in slot 29 is recommended.
Table 7-4 lists the pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector for the ALMI1 interface. For cable corresponding to the interface, see 13.7 Alarm Input/Output Cable.
Table 7-4 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface of the TN81SCA Front View Pin No. 1 2
87654321
Usage Positive input end for alarm signal 1 Negative input end for alarm signal 1 Positive input end for alarm signal 2 Positive input end for alarm signal 3 Negative input end for alarm signal 3 Negative input end for alarm signal 2 Positive input end for alarm signal 4 Negative input end for alarm signal 4
3 4 5 6 7 8
Table 7-5 lists the pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector for the ALMI2 interface. For cable corresponding to the interface, see 13.7 Alarm Input/Output Cable. Table 7-5 Pin assignment of the ALMI2 interface of the TN81SCA Front View Pin No. 1 2
87654321
3 4 5 6 7 8
Table 7-6 lists the pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector for the ALMO1 interface.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
7-9
Table 7-6 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 interface of the TN81SCA Front View Pin No. 1 2
87654321
Usage Positive output end for alarm signal 1 Negative output end for alarm signal 1 Positive output end for alarm signal 2 Positive end for alarm concatenation signal 1 Negative end for alarm concatenation signal 1 Negative output end for alarm signal 2 Positive end for alarm concatenation signal 2 Negative end for alarm concatenation signal 2
3 4 5 6 7 8
NOTE
The alarm concatenation cable need be fabricated according to the interface pin assignment of the ALMO1 interface on the equipment installation site.
Table 7-7 lists the pin assignment of the ETH and EXT interfaces. For cable corresponding to the interface, see 13.3.1 Ethernet Cable. Table 7-7 Pin assignment of the ETH and EXT interfaces of the TN81SCA Front View Pin No. 1 2
87654321
Usage Positive transmit end Negative transmit end Positive receive end Unspecified Unspecified Negative receive end Unspecified
3 4 5 6 7 and 8
Table 7-8 lists the pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector for the LAMP1 and LAMP2 interfaces. For cable corresponding to the interface, see 13.6 Cabinet Indicator Cable.
7-10
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Table 7-8 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and LAMP2 interfaces of the TN81SCA Front View Pin No. 1 2
87654321
Usage Positive end for critical alarm signals Negative end for critical alarm signals Positive end for minor alarm signals Positive end for driving signals of the power indicator Negative end for driving signals of the power indicator Negative end for minor alarm signals Positive end for major alarm signals Negative end for major alarm signals
3 4 5 6 7 8
Table 7-9 lists the pin assignment of the F&f interface. For cable corresponding to the interface, see 13.3.1 Ethernet Cable. Table 7-9 Pin assignment of the F&f interface of the TN81SCA Front View Pin No. 1 2
87654321
Usage Transmit end of the commissioning serial port Receive end of the commissioning serial port Transmit end of OAM signals Grounding Grounding Receive end of OAM signals Unspecified Unspecified
3 4 5 6 7 8
7.1.6 Valid Slots

The TN81SCA can be housed in any of slots 29 - 30 of the subrack.

You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the TN81SCA. You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the TN81SCA. l
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Environment Monitor Interface


Specifications of the TN81SCA board cover board dimensions, weight and power consumption. Board dimensions (mm): 261.4 (H) x 266.8 (D) x 22.0 (W) Weight (kg): 0.93 Power consumption (W): 25.0
7.2 TN82SCA
This section describes the TN82SCA, a system control, communication and auxiliary processing board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 7.2.1 Version Description The function version of the TN82SCA is TN82. 7.2.2 Functions and Features The TN82SCA is used to perform the synchronous equipment management function (SEMF) and message communication function (MCF), and to process the system protocol packets. 7.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TN82SCA mainly consist of the system control module, system communication module, auxiliary processing module, and power supply module. 7.2.4 Jumper On the TN82SCA, there are jumpers, which are used to set the running state for the board. 7.2.5 Front Panel On the front panel of the TN82SCA, there are indicators, buttons and interfaces. 7.2.6 Valid Slots The TN82SCA can be housed in any of slots 29 - 30 of the subrack. 7.2.7 Board Configuration Reference You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the TN82SCA. 7.2.8 Technical Specifications Specifications of the TN82SCA board cover board dimensions, weight and power consumption.

The function version of the TN82SCA is TN82.
NOTE
The SCA has two function versions, that is, TN81 and TN82. The differences between the two versions are as follows: l The performance of the TN82SCA is improved, and the specifications of the TN82SCA are changed. In this document, the TN81SCA and TN82SCA are referred to as the SCA, unless otherwise specified.
7-12
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)

The TN82SCA is used to perform the synchronous equipment management function (SEMF) and message communication function (MCF), and to process the system protocol packets. The TN82SCA board supports the following functions and features: l l l l System control Communication Auxiliary processing Board 1+1 protection

The TN82SCA mainly consist of the system control module, system communication module, auxiliary processing module, and power supply module. Figure 7-4 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the TN82SCA. Figure 7-4 Block diagram for the working principle of the TN82SCA
Backplane ALMI1 ALMI2 ALMO1 LAMP1 LAMP2 PIU FAN
Auxiliary processing module
Working/protection Management bus
Another SCA Another SCA
System control module
Working/protection backup bus
ETH EXT F&f
System communication module
Communication bus Other boards
5 .V
. .
1.1 V
. . .
Power supply module
-48 V/-60 V Fuse -48 V/-60 V
PIU PIU
System Control Module

This module performs the following functions. l
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Manages and configures the entire NE and boards housed in the NE.
l l l l
Collects data on alarms and performance. Processes protocol packets. Backups important data. The working and protection TN82SCA monitor status of each other. If the working TN82SCA fails, the system control module controls the switching and realizes 1+1 protection for the TN82SCA.
System Communication Module

This module performs the following functions. l l l l Integrates with an Ethernet switching module, which is used to perform non-blocking switching of packets from each board. Provides one 10M/100M Ethernet interface to connect to the U2000. Provides one 10M/100M autosensing Ethernet interface for communication with the extended subrack. Provides an F&f interface, which is used to connect the TN82SCA to a PC or workstation.
Auxiliary Processing Module

This module performs the following functions. l l l l l l Monitors the status of the PIU and the status of the system power supply accessed from the PIU. Monitors the status of the fan board, provide fan alarms and manage fans. Provides one interface for 4 x cabinet alarm indicators output. Provides one interface for 4 x cabinet alarm indicators concatenation. Provides two interfaces for 8 x alarm input. Provides one interface for 2 x alarm output and 2 x alarm concatenation.
Power Supply Module

This module converts the DC voltage provided by the PIU board into the voltage that is required by each module of the TN82SCA board.
7.2.4 Jumper
On the TN82SCA, there are jumpers, which are used to set the running state for the board.
CAUTION
Do not change the default setting of the jumpers. Otherwise, the board may become faulty. Figure 7-5 shows where J1006, J25, and J26 are located on the TN82SCA. l l
7-14
J1006, for which the silk screen on the PCB is WE. J25, for which the silk screen on the PCB is RTC.
J26, which is used to debug the software. They correspond to DEBUG3-DEBUG0, which form a line in the high-to-low order and indicate a four-bit binary numeral. The most left one bit of this binary numeral is the high bit. Refer to Table 7-11.
Figure 7-5 Jumpers on the TN82SCA
POWER
3 2 1 0
J26
123
J25
CPU
321
J1006
Table 7-10 lists details on the jumpers on the TN82SCA. Table 7-10 Jumpers on the TN82SCA Jumper J25 Function Enable the battery. Description The jumper cap is capped in 1-2 by default, the battery is enabled. In this manner, the real-time clock does not lost after the board is powered off. When this jumper is capped in 2-3 or not capped, the BIOS cannot be written. When this jumper is capped in 1-2, the BIOS can be written.
J1006
Enable the writing on the BIOS.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
7-15
Jumper J26
Function Set the running state of the board.
Description If the jumper is not capped, the corresponding bit is "0". If the jumper is capped, the corresponding bit is "1". The bits form a line in the high-to-low order and indicate a four-bit binary numeral. The most left one bit of this binary numeral is the high bit. See Table 7-11.
Table 7-11 J26 jumpers DEB UG3 DEB UG2 DEB UG1 DEB UG0 Corres pondi ng Value 0000 0011 0100 0101 0110 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Description
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Indicates the running state, the default state, where the watchdog is enabled. Indicates the debugging state. Indicates the running state where the watchdog is disabled. Indicates the maintenance state. Indicates the emulation running state. Erases the database. Erases the NE software (patch included). Erases the database and NE software (patch included). Erases the database, NE software and NE.ini file. Erases the extended BIOS and system parameter field in the file system and FLASH memory. Recovers the system parameter field as default.
1010
7.2.5 Front Panel

On the front panel of the TN82SCA, there are indicators, buttons and interfaces.

Figure 7-6 shows the appearance of the front panel of the TN82SCA.
Figure 7-6 Appearance of the front panel of the TN82SCA
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the TN82SCA. l
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status
l l l
PROG indicator, red or green, which indicates the running status of the program SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status ACT indicator, green, which indicates the board active/standby status
Board reset button

As shown in Figure 7-6, the reset button is marked as RESET on the front panel of the board. The RESET button is used for cold reset of the TN82SCA.
Interface
Table 7-12 lists the types and usage of the interfaces of the TN82SCA. Table 7-12 Types and usage of the interfaces on the TN82SCA Interface on the Front Panel LAMP1 LAMP2 ETH EXT ALMO1 ALMI1 ALMI2 F&f Interface Type RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 Usage Interface for outputting cabinet indicators Interface for concatenating cabinet indicators 10M/100M Ethernet interface for connecting to the NMS. 10M/100M autosensing Ethernet interface using as an NMS concatenation interface. Common interface for 2 x alarm outputs and 2 x alarm concatenations Interface for inputting the first to fourth channels of alarms Interface for inputting the fifth to eighth channels of alarms OAM interface
NOTE
If 1+1 protection is configured for the TN82SCA on the equipment, you can use the interface of either the TN82SCA. The interface on the TN82SCA housed in slot 29 is recommended.
Table 7-13 lists the pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector for the ALMI1 interface. For cable corresponding to the interface, see 13.7 Alarm Input/Output Cable.
7-18
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Table 7-13 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface of the TN82SCA Front View Pin No. 1 2
87654321
3 4 5 6 7 8
Table 7-14 lists the pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector for the ALMI2 interface. For cable corresponding to the interface, see 13.7 Alarm Input/Output Cable. Table 7-14 Pin assignment of the ALMI2 interface of the TN82SCA Front View Pin No. 1 2
87654321
3 4 5 6 7 8
Table 7-15 lists the pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector for the ALMO1 interface.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
7-19
Table 7-15 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 interface of the TN82SCA Front View Pin No. 1 2
87654321
Usage Positive output end for alarm signal 1 Negative output end for alarm signal 1 Positive output end for alarm signal 2 Positive end for alarm concatenation signal 1 Negative end for alarm concatenation signal 1 Negative output end for alarm signal 2 Positive end for alarm concatenation signal 2 Negative end for alarm concatenation signal 2
3 4 5 6 7 8
NOTE
The alarm concatenation cable need be fabricated according to the interface pin assignment of the ALMO1 interface on the equipment installation site.
Table 7-16 lists the pin assignment of the ETH and EXT interfaces. These interfaces support auto-adaptation to a straight-through network cable or a crossover network cable. For cable corresponding to the interface, see 13.3.1 Ethernet Cable. Table 7-16 Pin assignment of the ETH and EXT interfaces of the TN82SCA Front View Pin No. 1 2
87654321
Usage Positive of twisted pair 1 Negative of twisted pair 1 Positive of twisted pair 2 Unspecified Unspecified Negative of twisted pair 2 Unspecified
3 4 5 6 7 and 8
Table 7-17 lists the pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector for the LAMP1 and LAMP2 interfaces. For cable corresponding to the interface, see 13.6 Cabinet Indicator Cable.
7-20
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Table 7-17 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and LAMP2 interfaces of the TN82SCA Front View Pin No. 1 2
87654321
Usage Positive end for critical alarm signals Negative end for critical alarm signals Positive end for minor alarm signals Positive end for driving signals of the power indicator Negative end for driving signals of the power indicator Negative end for minor alarm signals Positive end for major alarm signals Negative end for major alarm signals
3 4 5 6 7 8
Table 7-18 lists the pin assignment of the F&f interface. For cable corresponding to the interface, see 13.3.1 Ethernet Cable. Table 7-18 Pin assignment of the F&f interface of the TN82SCA Front View Pin No. 1 2
87654321
Usage Transmit end of the commissioning serial port Receive end of the commissioning serial port Transmit end of OAM signals Grounding Grounding Receive end of OAM signals Unspecified Unspecified
3 4 5 6 7 8
7.2.6 Valid Slots

The TN82SCA can be housed in any of slots 29 - 30 of the subrack.

You can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the TN82SCA. You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the TN82SCA.
Environment Monitor Interface

Specifications of the TN82SCA board cover board dimensions, weight and power consumption. Board dimensions (mm): 261.4 (H) x 266.8 (D) x 22.0 (W) Weight (kg): 0.96 Power consumption (W): 26.7
7.3 TN81XCS
This section describes the TN81XCS, a general cross-connect and timing board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 7.3.1 Version Description The function version of the TN81XCS is TN81. 7.3.2 Functions and Features The TN81XCS is mainly used to groom services and process clock and time signals. 7.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TN81XCS mainly consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, clock module and power supply module. 7.3.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the TN81XCS, there are indicators, buttons and interfaces. 7.3.5 Valid Slots The TN81XCS can be housed in any of slots 9 or slot 10 of the subrack. 7.3.6 Technical Specifications Specifications of the TN81XCS board cover board dimensions, weight and power consumption.

The function version of the TN81XCS is TN81.
NOTE
The XCS has three function versions, that is TN81, TN82, and TN83. The differences between these versions are as follows: l The TN82XCS and TN83XCS support external time interfaces. l The TN82XCS and TN83XCS support the board version replacement function. That is, the TN82XCS can replace the TN81XCS and the TN83XCS can replace the TN82XCS or TN81XCS. When a board with a later version is used with a board with an earlier version on one NE, if you query the board with a later version on the NMS, the logical version of the board with a later version is the same as that of the board with an earlier version. In this document, the TN81XCS, TN82XCS, and TN83XCS are referred to as the XCS, unless otherwise specified.
7-22
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)

The TN81XCS is mainly used to groom services and process clock and time signals. The TN81XCS board supports the following functions and features: l l l l Service grooming Clock synchronization and time synchronization External clock interface Board 1+1 protection

The TN81XCS mainly consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, clock module and power supply module. shows the block diagram for the working principle of the TN81XCS. Figure 7-7 Block diagram for the working principle of the TN81XCS
Backplane CLKI CLKO CLK Line clock Processing boards Processing boards Processing boards, SCA, another XCS
Clock module
IEEE 1588 V2 packets System clock
Clock signal
Clock signal
Cross-connect module
Service signal
Processing boards
Control status signal
Control and communication module
Communication bus
SCA
Power detection signal 5V . . . 1.2V . . . -48 V/-60 V PIU PIU
Power supply module
-48 V/-60 V
Cross-connect Module
l l
Schedules services of 320 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity in full-duplex mode. Provides a back pressure mechanism to buffer cells and thus to decrease the impacts of a large number of burst switching requests on the system.
Control and Communication Module

This module performs the following functions: l l l l Provides channels for the XCS to communicate with the SCA and processing board. Realizes board configuration and monitors the operating status of the board. Realizes protection and switching of the XCS. Works with the SCA to detect the status signals of the LAM TEST and ALM CUT buttons, and performs control accordingly.
Clock Module
This module performs the following functions. l l l Provides one interface for input of 75-ohm clock signals and one interface for output of 75-ohm clock signals. Inputs or outputs the 2 MHz or 2 Mbit/s clock. Provides one combined interfaces for output and input of 120-ohm clock signals. Inputs and outputs the 2 MHz or 2 Mbit/s clock. Traces the external clock source, line clock source, and provides synchronous clock sources for the XCS or other boards.
NOTE
The external clock source includes the external clock signals accessed from this XCS and another one.
l l
Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 protocol and achieves clock synchronization and time synchronization of equipment. Supports the 1588 ACR clock.
Power Supply Module

7.3.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the TN81XCS, there are indicators, buttons and interfaces.

Figure 7-8 shows the appearance of the front panel of the TN81XCS.
7-24
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Figure 7-8 Front panel of the TN81XCS
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the TN81XCS. l l l l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status ACT indicator, green, which indicates the board active/standby status PROG indicator, red or green, which indicates the running status of the program SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status SYNC indicator, red or green, which indicates the clock synchronization status ALMC indicator, orange, which indicate alarm cutting

Interfaces
Table 7-19 lists the types and usage of the interfaces of the TN81XCS. For cables corresponding to the interface, see 13.5.1 External Clock Cable. Table 7-19 Types and usage of the interfaces on the TN81XCS Interface on the Front Panel CLKI CLKO CLK Interface Type SMB SMB RJ-45 Usage Interface for inputting the 75-ohm external clock Interface for outputting the 75-ohm external clock Common interface for outputting and inputting the 120-ohm external clock
CAUTION
l The external clock interface supports the 2 Mbit/s and 2 MHz configuration modes. One 120ohm external clock interface and two 75-ohm external time interfaces comprise a logical interface, which backs up external clock signals. One TN81XCS, however, can access only one type of external clock sources. l If the TN81XCS boards of the equipment are configured with 1+1 protection, the clock interfaces on the front panels of the two TN81XCS boards function independently and do not form backup, that is, the external clock source traced by each TN81XCS includes the external clock signals accessed from this TN81XCS and the other one. Table 7-20 lists the pin assignment of the CLK interface. Table 7-20 Pin assignment of the CLK interface of the TN81XCS Front View Pin No. 1 2
87654321
Usage Negative receive end of 120-ohm external clock Positive receive end of 120-ohm external clock Unspecified Negative transmit end of 120-ohm external clock Positive transmit end of 120-ohm external clock Unspecified Unspecified
3 4 5 6 7 and 8
7-26
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Buttons
Table 7-21 shows buttons on the TN81XCS board. Table 7-21 Description of buttons on the TN81XCS board Button Silkscreen LAMP TEST Usage The LAMP TEST button is used for testing the indicators. If you press the button, all indicators on the board, excluding the indicator for the Ethernet service electrical interface and L/A indicator for the EFF8, are on. The ALM CUT button is used to mute audible alarms. When you press and hold the ALM CUT button for less than 3s, the alarms are muted. When you press and hold the ALM CUT button for 3s or more, the alarms are permanently muted and the ALMC indicator is on. When you press and hold the ALM CUT button for another 3s or more, the alarms are unmuted and the ALMC indicator is off.
ALM CUT
7.3.5 Valid Slots

The TN81XCS can be housed in any of slots 9 or slot 10 of the subrack.

Specifications of the TN81XCS board cover board dimensions, weight and power consumption. Board dimensions (mm): 294.1 (H) x 266.8 (D) x 40.0 (W) Weight (kg): about 2.45 Power consumption (W): 65.4
7.4 TN82XCS
This section describes the TN82XCS, a general cross-connect and timing board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 7.4.1 Version Description The function version of the TN82XCS is TN82. 7.4.2 Functions and Features The TN82XCS is mainly used to groom services and process clock and time signals. 7.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TN82XCS mainly consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, clock module and power supply module. 7.4.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the TN82XCS, there are indicators, buttons and interfaces.
7.4.5 Valid Slots The TN82XCS can be housed in any of slots 9 or slot 10 of the subrack. 7.4.6 Technical Specifications Specifications of the TN82XCS board cover board dimensions, weight and power consumption.

NOTE

The TN82XCS is mainly used to groom services and process clock and time signals. The TN82XCS board supports the following functions and features: l l l l Service grooming Clock synchronization and time synchronization External clock/time interface Board 1+1 protection

The TN82XCS mainly consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, clock module and power supply module. Figure 7-9 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the TN82XCS.
7-28
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Figure 7-9 Block diagram for the working principle of the TN82XCS
Backplane CLKI/TOD CLKO/TOD CLK/TOD System clock Another XCS Processing boards Processing boards, SCA
Clock module
IEEE 1588 V2 packets System clock
Clock signal
Clock signal
Service signal
Processing boards
Control status signal
Communication bus
SCA
Power detection signal 5V . . . 1.2V -48 V/-60 V PIU PIU
Power supply module
-48 V/-60 V
Cross-connect Module
This module performs the following functions. l l Schedules services of 320 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity in full-duplex mode. Provides a back pressure mechanism to buffer cells and thus to decrease the impacts of a large number of burst switching requests on the system.

This module performs the following functions: l l l l Provides channels for the XCS to communicate with the SCA and processing board. Realizes board configuration and monitors the operating status of the board. Realizes protection and switching of the XCS. Works with the SCA to detect the status signals of the LAM TEST and ALM CUT buttons, and performs control accordingly.
Clock Module
l l
Provides one pair of interfaces for 75-ohm clock/time signals and one interface for 120ohm clock/time signals, for details see Interfaces. Traces the external clock source, line clock source, and provides synchronous clock sources for the XCS or other boards.
NOTE
l l
Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 protocol and achieves clock synchronization and time synchronization of equipment. Supports the 1588 ACR clock.
Power Supply Module

7.4.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the TN82XCS, there are indicators, buttons and interfaces.

7-30
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the TN82XCS. l l l l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status ACT indicator, green, which indicates the board active/standby status PROG indicator, red or green, which indicates the running status of the program SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status SYNC indicator, red or green, which indicates the clock synchronization status ALMC indicator, orange, which indicate alarm cutting

Interfaces
Table 7-22 lists the types and usage of the interfaces of the TN82XCS. For cables corresponding to the interface, see 13.5.1 External Clock Cable. Table 7-22 Types and usage of the interfaces on the TN82XCS Interface on the Front Panel Interface Type Working mode 1 External clock Working mode 2 External Time (1PPS + Time Information) Input 1PPS signal input interface Working mode 3 External Time (1PPS + Time Information) Output 1PPS signal output interface Working mode 4 External Time (DCLS) Input DCLS external time signal input interface Working mode 5 External Time (DCLS) Output DCLS external time signal output interface
CLKI/TOD (1PPS/ DCLS)
SMB
Interface for inputting the 75-ohm external clock Interface for outputting the 75-ohm external clock
CLKO/TOD (Serial Info.)
SMB
Time information input interface
Time information output interface
CLK/TOD
RJ-45
External clock or external time interface (for details, see Table 7-23)
CAUTION
l The SMB interfaces can only be configured to one of the five working modes. l If the preceding interfaces are used as the external time interfaces, CLKI/TOD (1PPS/DCLS) only supports TTL level, while CLKO/TOD (Serial Info.) supports TTL level or RS232 level. l The external clock supports the 2 Mbit/s mode and 2 MHz mode. One 120-ohm external clock interface and two 75-ohm external time interfaces comprise a logical interface, , which backs up external clock signals. One TN82XCS, however, can access only one type of external clock sources. l If the TN82XCS is configured with the 1+1 protection, the clock and time interfaces on the front panel of the TN82XCS are used independently instead of being backups for others, that is, the external clock source traced by each TN82XCS includes the external clock signals accessed by this TN82XCS and another one. Table 7-23 lists the pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface.
7-32
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Table 7-23 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface of the TN82XCS Front View Pin No. Working Mode 1 External Clock Working Mode 2 External Time Input (1PPS + Time Information) Working Mode 3 External Time Output (1PPS + Time Information ) Unspecified Unspecified Working Mode 4 External Time input (DCLS) Working Mode 5 External Time output (DCLS)
87654321
Negative receive end of 120-ohm external clock Positive receive end of 120-ohm external clock Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
Negative RS422 input for the 1pps signal Grounding end
Negative RS422 output for the 1pps signal Grounding end
Negative RS422 input for the DCLS time signal Grounding end
Negative RS422 output for the DCLS time signal Grounding end
Negative transmit end of 120-ohm external clock Positive transmit end of 120-ohm external clock Unspecified
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
Positive RS422 input for the 1pps signal Negative RS422 input for time information
Positive RS422 output for the 1pps signal Negative RS422 output for time information
Positive RS422 input for the DCLS time signal Unspecified
Positive RS422 output for the DCLS time signal Unspecified
Unspecified
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
7-33
Front View
Pin No.
Working Mode 1 External Clock
Working Mode 2 External Time Input (1PPS + Time Information)
Working Mode 3 External Time Output (1PPS + Time Information ) Positive RS422 output for time information
Working Mode 4 External Time input (DCLS)
Working Mode 5 External Time output (DCLS)
Unspecified
Positive RS422 input for time information
Unspecified
Unspecified
NOTE
The CLK/TOD interface can only be configured to one of the five working modes.
Buttons
Table 7-24 shows buttons on the TN82XCS board. Table 7-24 Description of buttons on the TN82XCS board Button Silkscreen LAMP TEST Usage The LAMP TEST button is used for testing the indicators. If you press the button, all indicators on the board, excluding the indicator for the Ethernet service electrical interface and L/A indicator for the EFF8, are on. The ALM CUT button is used to mute audible alarms. When you press and hold the ALM CUT button for less than 3s, the alarms are muted. When you press and hold the ALM CUT button for 3s or more, the alarms are permanently muted and the ALMC indicator is on. When you press and hold the ALM CUT button for another 3s or more, the alarms are unmuted and the ALMC indicator is off.
ALM CUT
7.4.5 Valid Slots

The TN82XCS can be housed in any of slots 9 or slot 10 of the subrack.

Specifications of the TN82XCS board cover board dimensions, weight and power consumption. Board dimensions (mm): 294.1 (H) x 266.8 (D) x 40.0 (W)
Weight (kg): about 2.48 Power consumption (W): 73.5
7.5 TN83XCS
This section describes the TN83XCS, an enhanced cross-connect and clock board, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications. 7.5.1 Version Description The function version of the TN83XCS is TN83. 7.5.2 Functions and Features The TN83XCS is used to schedule packet services and process clock/time signals. 7.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The TN83XCS mainly consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, clock module, and power supply module. 7.5.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the TN83XCS, there are indicators, interfaces, and buttons. 7.5.5 Valid Slots The TN83XCS can be housed in any of slots 9 - 10 of the subrack. 7.5.6 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the TN83XCS cover the dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

NOTE

The TN83XCS is used to schedule packet services and process clock/time signals. The TN83XCS supports the following functions and features: l l
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Service scheduling Clock synchronization and time synchronization

l l
External clock/time interface Board 1+1 protection

The TN83XCS mainly consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, clock module, and power supply module. Figure 7-11 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the TN83XCS. Figure 7-11 Block diagram for the working principle of the TN83XCS
Backplane
CLKI/TOD CLKO/TOD CLK/TOD Line clock IEEE 1588 V2 packet
Processing board Processing board The other XCS Processing board, SCA, or the other XCS
Clock module
External clock/time System clock
Clock signal
Clock signal
Service signal
Processing board
Controls status signal
Communication bus
SCA board
Power detection signal
5V . . . 1.2 V
Power supply module
-48 V / -60 V -48 V / -60 V
Cross-Connect Module
This module performs the following functions: l l Schedules services of 320 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity in full-duplex mode. Provides a back pressure mechanism to buffer cells and thus to decrease the impacts of a large number of burst switching requests on the system.

This module performs the following functions: l
7-36
Provides channels for the XCS to communicate with the SCA and processing board.
l l l
Realizes board configuration and monitors the operating status of the board. Realizes protection and switching of the XCS. Works with the SCA to detect the status signals of the LAM TEST and ALM CUT buttons, and performs control accordingly.
Clock Module
This module performs the following functions: l l Provides one pair of 75-ohm external clock/time interface and one 120-ohm external clock/ time interface. For details on the interfaces, see Interface. Traces the external clock source and line clock source, provides a synchronous clock source for the XCS and other boards, and thus achieves physical synchronization of the equipment.
NOTE
l l
Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 protocol and achieves clock synchronization and time synchronization of equipment. Supports the IEEE 1588 ACR clock.
Power Supply Module

7.5.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the TN83XCS, there are indicators, interfaces, and buttons.

Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
7-37
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the TN83XCS: l l l l l l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status ACT indicator, green, which indicates the board active/standby status PROG indicator, red or green, which indicates the running status of the program SRV indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the service status SYNC indicator, red or green, which indicates the clock synchronization status ALMC indicator, orange, which indicate alarm cutting
Interface
Table 7-25 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the TN83XCS. For cables corresponding to the interface, see 13.5.1 External Clock Cable.
Table 7-25 Types and usage of the interfaces on the TN83XCS Interface on the Front Panel Interface Type Working Mode 1 External Clock Working Mode 2 External Time (1PPS + Time Informatio n) Input 1PPS signal input interface Time information input interface Working Mode 3 External Time (1PPS + Time Information ) Output 1PPS signal output interface Time information output interface Working Mode 4 External Time (DCLS) Input DCLS external time signal input interface Working Mode 5 External Time (DCLS) Output
CLKI/TOD (1PPS/ DCLS) CLKO/TOD (Serial Info.)
SMB
75-ohm external clock input interface 75-ohm external clock output interface
DCLS external time signal output interface -
SMB
CLK/TOD
RJ-45
External clock or time interface (for details, see Table 7-26.)
CAUTION
l The SMB interface can work in any one of the five working modes. l When used as an external time interface, CLKI/TOD (1PPS/DCLS) supports only the TTL level and CLKO/TOD (Serial Info.) supports either the TTL level or RS232 level. l The external clock interface supports the 2 Mbit/s and 2 MHz configuration modes. One 120ohm external clock interface and two 75-ohm external time interfaces comprise a logical interface, which backs up external clock signals. One TN83XCS, however, can access only one type of external clock sources. l When 1+1 protection is configured for the TN83XCS on the equipment, the clock and time interfaces on the two TN83XCS are independent and do not back up each other. That is, the external clock sources traced by one TN83XCS include the external clock signals accessed by the TN83XCS and the external clock signals accessed by the other TN83XCS. Table 7-26 lists the pins of the CLK/TOD interface.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
7-39
Table 7-26 Pins of the CLK/TOD interface of the TN83XCS Front View Pi n No . Working Mode 1 External Clock Working Mode 2 External Time Input (1PPS + Time Information) 1 Receive negative for the 120-ohm external clock Receive positive for the 120-ohm external clock Unspecified Unspecified Working Mode 3 External Time Output (1PPS + Time Information) Unspecified Working Mode 4 External Time Input (DCLS) Unspecified Working Mode 5 External Time Output (DCLS) Unspecified
87654321
Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
RS422 input negative for 1PPS signals Grounding end
RS422 output negative for 1PPS signals Grounding end
RS422 input negative for DCLS time signals Grounding end
RS422 output negative for DCLS time signals Grounding end
Transmit negative for the 120-ohm external clock Transmit positive for the 120-ohm external clock Unspecified
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
RS422 input positive for 1PPS signals RS422 input negative for time information RS422 input positive for time information
RS422 output positive for 1PPS signals RS422 output negative for time information RS422 output positive for time information
RS422 input positive for DCLS time signals Unspecified
RS422 output positive for DCLS time signals Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
Unspecified
7-40
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
NOTE
The CLK/TOD interface can work in any of the five working modes.
Button
Table 7-27 lists the buttons on the front panel of the TN83XCS. Table 7-27 Buttons on the front panel of the TN83XCS Button Silkscreen LAMP TEST Usage The LAMP TEST button is used for testing the indicators. If you press the button, all indicators on the board, excluding the indicator for the Ethernet service electrical interface and L/A indicator for the EFF8, are on. The ALM CUT button is used to mute audible alarms. When you press and hold the ALM CUT button for less than 3s, the alarms are muted. When you press and hold the ALM CUT button for 3s or more, the alarms are permanently muted and the ALMC indicator is on. When you press and hold the ALM CUT button for another 3s or more, the alarms are unmuted and the ALMC indicator is off.
ALM CUT
7.5.5 Valid Slots

The TN83XCS can be housed in any of slots 9 - 10 of the subrack.

The technical specifications of the TN83XCS cover the dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board dimensions (mm): 294.1 (H) x 266.8 (D) x 40.0 (W) Weight (kg): 2.4 Power consumption (W): 46.1
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
7-41
8 WDM Boards
8
About This Chapter
WDM Boards
For the OptiX PTN 3900, WDM boards include the CMR2 and CMR4. 8.1 CMR2 This section describes the CMR2, a 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots, characteristic code and technical specifications. 8.2 CMR4 This section describes the CMR4, a 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots, characteristic code and technical specifications.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
8-1
8 WDM Boards
8.1 CMR2
This section describes the CMR2, a 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots, characteristic code and technical specifications. 8.1.1 Version Description The function version of the CMR2 is TN11. 8.1.2 Functions and Features The CMR2 is mainly used to add or drop two wavelengths of signals to or from multiplexed signals. The CMR2 supports the adding/dropping of optical signals, concatenation port, and query of wavelength. 8.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The CMR2 mainly consists of the OADM optical module. 8.1.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the CMR2, there are an indicator, interfaces and a laser safety class label. 8.1.5 Valid Slots The CMR2 can be housed in any of slots 1-8 and 11-18 in the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack. 8.1.6 Technical Specifications Specifications of the CMR2 board cover specifications of interfaces, board dimensions, weight and power consumption.

The function version of the CMR2 is TN11.

The CMR2 is mainly used to add or drop two wavelengths of signals to or from multiplexed signals. The CMR2 supports the adding/dropping of optical signals, concatenation port, and query of wavelength. Table 8-1 lists the functions and features of the CMR2. Table 8-1 Functions and features of the CMR2 Function and Feature Basic function WDM specification Description Adds or drops two wavelengths of signals to or from the multiplexed signals. Supports technical specifications of the coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM).
8-2
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
8 WDM Boards
Function and Feature Concatenation port
Description Provides intermediate ports for expansion. The capacity of upstream and downstream channels can be expanded by connecting the intermediate ports to other optical add/drop multiplexing boards. Specifies and queries the add/drop wavelengths.
Wavelength query

The CMR2 mainly consists of the OADM optical module. Figure 8-1 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the CMR2. Figure 8-1 Block diagram for the working principle of the CMR2
D1 D2 A1 A2
In Out
OADM optical module
MO MI
In the Adding Direction

The MI port receives signals from the active optical channel. The OADM optical module then multiplexes these signals into the two wavelengths accessed from A1 and A2 ports. The multiplexed signals are then output from the OUT port.
In the Dropping Direction

The IN port receives the multiplexed signals from the upstream station. The signals are then demultiplexed into two wavelengths, which are then output through the D1 and D2 ports. Finally, the signals of other wavelengths are output from the MO port.
8.1.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the CMR2, there are an indicator, interfaces and a laser safety class label.

Figure 8-2 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CMR2.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
8-3
8 WDM Boards
Figure 8-2 Appearance of the front panel of the CMR2
CMR2
STAT
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT
OUT IN MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2
CMR2
Interfaces
There are eight LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the CMR2. Table 8-2 lists the type and usage of the optical interfaces. For fiber corresponding to the interfaces, see 13.1.1 Types of Fiber. Table 8-2 Optical interfaces of the CMR2 Interface on the Front Panel A1-A2 Interface Type LC Usage
Receive the signals output from the optical wavelength converting board.
8-4
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
8 WDM Boards
Interface on the Front Panel D1-D2 IN OUT MO MI
Interface Type LC LC LC LC LC
Usage
Transmit signals to the optical wavelength converting board. Receive multiplexed signals. Transmit multiplexed signals. Output concatenated signals. Input concatenated signals.
Indicator
One indicator is on the front panel of the CMR2. STAT indicator, red, green or orange, which indicates the board state. For details on indications of indicators, see A.2 Board Indicators.
Laser Safety Class

The safety class of the laser on the board is CLASS 1M.The maximum launched optical power of the optical interfaces ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW).
8.1.5 Valid Slots

The CMR2 can be housed in any of slots 1-8 and 11-18 in the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack.

Specifications of the CMR2 board cover specifications of interfaces, board dimensions, weight and power consumption. Table 8-3 lists the specifications of optical interfaces on the CMR2. Table 8-3 Specifications of optical interfaces on the CMR2 Item Working wavelength range (nm) Channel spacing (nm) 0.5 dB passband bandwidth (nm) Insertion loss in the wavelength-dropping channel (dB)
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Specification 1271 to 1611 20 6.5 1.5
Optical Interface IN-D1 IN-D2
8-5
8 WDM Boards
Item Adjacent channel isolation (dB) Non-adjacent channel isolation (dB) 0.5 dB passband bandwidth (nm) Insertion loss in the wavelength-adding channel (dB) Insertion loss (dB) Isolation (dB) Return loss (dB)
Specification > 25 > 35 6.5 1.5
Optical Interface
A1-OUT A2-OUT
1.0 > 13 > 40
IN-MO MI-OUT -
The CMR2 adds/drops and multiplexes two signals to/from the multiplexed signals. Table 8-4 lists the rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the CMR2. Table 8-4 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the CMR2 Group Wavelength (nm) A1/D1 1 2 3 4 5 1271 1471 1511 1551 1591 A2/D2 1371 1491 1531 1571 1611
8.2 CMR4
This section describes the CMR4, a 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots, characteristic code and technical specifications. 8.2.1 Version Description
8 WDM Boards
The function version of the CMR4 is TN11. 8.2.2 Functions and Features The CMR4 supports the adding/dropping of optical signals, concatenation port, and query of wavelength. 8.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The CMR4 mainly consists of the OADM optical module. 8.2.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the CMR4, there are an indicator, interfaces and a laser safety class label. 8.2.5 Valid Slots The CMR4 can be housed in any of slots 1-8 and 11-18 in the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack. 8.2.6 Technical Specifications Specifications of the CMR4 board cover specifications of interfaces, board dimensions, weight and power consumption.

The function version of the CMR4 is TN11.

The CMR4 supports the adding/dropping of optical signals, concatenation port, and query of wavelength. Table 8-5 lists the functions and features of the CMR4. Table 8-5 Functions and features of the CMR4 Function and Feature Basic function WDM specification Concatenation port Description Adds or drops four wavelengths of signals to or from the multiplexed signals. Supports technical specifications of the coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM). Provides intermediate ports for expansion. The capacity of upstream and downstream channels can be expanded by connecting the intermediate ports to other optical add/drop multiplexing boards. Specifies and queries the add/drop wavelengths.
Wavelength query

The CMR4 mainly consists of the OADM optical module. Figure 8-3 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the CMR4.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
8-7
8 WDM Boards
Figure 8-3 Block diagram for the working principle of the CMR4
D1 D4 A1 A4
In Out
OADM optical module
MO MI
In the Adding Direction

The MI port receives signals from the active optical channel. The OADM optical module then multiplexes these signals into the four wavelengths accessed from the A1-A4 ports. The multiplexed signals are then output from the OUT port.
In the Dropping Direction

The IN port receives the multiplexed signals from the upstream station. The signals are then demultiplexed into four wavelengths, which are then output through the D1-D4 ports. Finally, the signals of other wavelengths are output from the MO port.
8.2.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the CMR4, there are an indicator, interfaces and a laser safety class label.

Figure 8-4 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CMR4.
8-8
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
8 WDM Boards
Figure 8-4 Appearance of the front panel of the CMR4
CMR4
STAT
LASER RADIATION
OUT IN MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2 D3 A3 D4 A4
CMR4
Interfaces
There are 12 LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the CMR4. Table 8-6 lists the type and usage of the optical interfaces. For fiber corresponding to the interfaces, see 13.1.1 Types of Fiber. Table 8-6 Optical interfaces of the CMR4 Optical Interface on the Front Panel A1-A4 Interface Type LC Usage
Receive signals output from the optical wavelength converting board or integrated client-side equipment.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
8-9
8 WDM Boards
Optical Interface on the Front Panel D1-D4 IN OUT MI MO
Interface Type LC LC LC LC LC
Usage
Transmit signals to the optical wavelength converting board or integrated client-side equipment. Receive multiplexed signals. Transmit multiplexed signals. Input concatenation signals when connected to the output optical interface of another OADM board. Output concatenation signals when connected to the input optical interface of another OADM board.
Indicator
STAT indicator, red, green or orange, which indicates the board state.

The safety class of the laser on the board is Class 1M.The maximum launched optical power of the optical interfaces ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW).
8.2.5 Valid Slots

The CMR4 can be housed in any of slots 1-8 and 11-18 in the OptiX PTN 3900 subrack.

Specifications of the CMR4 board cover specifications of interfaces, board dimensions, weight and power consumption. Table 8-7 lists the specifications of optical interfaces on the CMR4. Table 8-7 Specifications of optical interfaces on the CMR4 Item Working wavelength range (nm) Channel spacing (nm) 0.5 dB passband bandwidth (nm) Insertion loss in the wavelength-dropping channel (dB)
8-10
Specification 1291 to 1611 20 6.5 1.5
Optical Interface IN-D1 IN-D2 IN-D3 IN-D4
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
8 WDM Boards
Item Adjacent channel isolation (dB) Non-adjacent channel isolation (dB) 0.5 dB passband bandwidth (nm) Insertion loss in the wavelength-adding channel (dB) Insertion loss (dB) Isolation (dB) Return loss (dB)
Specification > 25 > 35 6.5 1.5
Optical Interface
A1-OUT A2-OUT A3-OUT A4-OUT IN-MO MI-OUT -
1.5 > 13 > 40
The CMR4 adds/drops and multiplexes four signals to/from the multiplexed signals. Table 8-8 lists the rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the CMR4. Table 8-8 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the CMR4 Group Wavelength (nm) A1/D1 1 2 3 4 1291 1391 1471 1511 A2/D2 1311 1411 1491 1531 A3/D3 1331 1431 1591 1551 A4/D4 1351 1451 1611 1571
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
8-11
9 Power Supply and Fan Boards
9
About This Chapter
Power Supply and Fan Boards
This chapter describes the power supply boards and fan boards, used for the OptiX PTN 3900 in terms of the version, function, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 9.1 PIU This section describes the PIU, used for the OptiX PTN 3900 in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 9.2 FAN This section describes the FAN, used for the OptiX PTN 3900, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
9-1
9.1 PIU
This section describes the PIU, used for the OptiX PTN 3900 in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 9.1.1 Version Description The function version of the PIU is TN81. 9.1.2 Functions and Features The PIU, a power interface unit, is used to access power, protect the equipment against lightning and perform filter. 9.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The PIU mainly consists of the power access module, lightning protection and filter module, power supply backup module and alarm detection module. 9.1.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the PIU, there are power interfaces, indicators and labels. 9.1.5 Valid Slots The PIU can be housed in slot 27 or slot 28 of the subrack. 9.1.6 Technical Specifications Specifications of the PIU board cover board dimensions, weight, power consumption, thermal design consumption and input voltage.

The function version of the PIU is TN81.

The PIU, a power interface unit, is used to access power, protect the equipment against lightning and perform filter. Table 9-1 lists functions and features of the PIU. Table 9-1 Functions and features of the PIU Function and Feature Power interface Protection against lightning Filter Description Provides external power interfaces for two channels of -48 V / - 60 V power supplies . Protects the equipment against lightning and report alarms if the protection fails. Provides power filtering function and perform structure shield for the board to enhance the electromagnetic compatibility of the system. Detects and reports power alarms.
Alarm monitoring
9-2
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Function and Feature Power backup
Description Two PIU boards can provide 1+1 hot backup. One PIU can supply required power for the entire subrack. In addition, the PIU provides one channel of 3.3 V power supply for batch backup..

The PIU mainly consists of the power access module, lightning protection and filter module, power supply backup module and alarm detection module. Figure 9-1 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the PIU. Figure 9-1 Block diagram for the working principle of the PIU
Backplane First channel of -48 V/ -60 V power supply Alarm detection module Lightning protection and filter module Power access module Lightning protection and filter module First channel of -48 V/ -60 V power supply Power supply backup module 3.3 V
SCA
Second channel of -48 V/ -60 V power supply
Second channel of -48 V/ -60V power supply Alarm detection module
SCA
Power Access Module

This module accesses the -48 V DC or -60 V DC power output by the DC PDU.
Lightning Protection and Filter Module

This module protects the equipment against lightning.
Power Supply Backup Module

This module combines two channels of input power into one channel, which is output as the backup power for the system.
Alarm Detection Module

This module detects the lightning protection failure, overvoltage and undervoltage of the power supply, and reports the results to the system control unit.
9.1.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the PIU, there are power interfaces, indicators and labels.

Figure 9-2 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU. Figure 9-2 Appearance of the front panel of the PIU
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the PIU. l
9-4
PWRA/PWRB indicator, green, which indicates the power status

ALM indicator, red, which indicates a fault of the power supply board
Interfaces
Interfaces for two channels of power supplies are present on the front panel of the PIU. Table 9-2 lists the types and usage of the interfaces. For cable corresponding to the interface, see 13.3.2 75-ohm 8 x E1 Cable. Table 9-2 Types and usage of the interfaces on the PIU Interface on the Front Panel RTN1(+) NEG1(-) RTN2(+) NEG2(-) Usage Input BGND power. Input -48 V power. Input BGND power. Input -48 V power.
Labels
Multi-channel power supply label: It indicates that multiple channels of power supply are available. No hot plug label: It indicates that do not insert or remove the component when the power is on.
CAUTION
This device has more than one power inputs. Do disconnect all power inputs to power off this device!
9.1.5 Valid Slots

The PIU can be housed in slot 27 or slot 28 of the subrack.

Specifications of the PIU board cover board dimensions, weight, power consumption, thermal design consumption and input voltage. Board dimensions (mm): 261.4 (height) x 272.4 (depth) x 40.0 (width) Weight (kg): 1.5 Power consumption (W): 9.3 Input voltage range (V DC): -38.4 to -57.6 (-48 V power supply)
-48.0 to -72.0 (-60 V power supply)
9.2 FAN
This section describes the FAN, used for the OptiX PTN 3900, in terms of the version, function, feature, working principle, front panel, valid slots and technical specifications. 9.2.1 Version Description The function version of the FAN is TN81. 9.2.2 Functions and Features The FAN is used to adjust the fan rotating speed and detect states of fans. 9.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow The FAN mainly consists of the start-delay/combiner/filter module, fan speed adjustment module and fan speed reporting module. 9.2.4 Front Panel On the front panel of the FAN, there are indicators and Fan warning label. 9.2.5 Valid Slots The FAN can be housed in slot 39 or 40 of the subrack. 9.2.6 Technical Specifications Specifications of the FAN board cover board dimensions, weight, power consumption and working voltage.

The function version of the FAN is TN81.

The FAN is used to adjust the fan rotating speed and detect states of fans. The FAN has the following functions and features. l l l l l Dissipates heat for the system. Intelligently adjusst the fan rotating speed. Detects states of fans. Reports the fan alarm information, version number and in-position information. Provides alarm indicators.

The FAN mainly consists of the start-delay/combiner/filter module, fan speed adjustment module and fan speed reporting module. Figure 9-3 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the FAN.
9-6
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Figure 9-3 Block diagram for the working principle of the FAN
Fan -48 V -48 V -48 V
Combination Start delay Filtering
-48 V
Combiner/start-delay/filter module System control unit System control unit
-48 V
Fan speed adjustment module Fan speed reporting module
Combiner/Start-Delay/Filter Module
This module combines two channels of - 48 V power supplies, and then sends the combined power supply to the start-delay circuits. If the accessing of one channel of the power supply fails, the fans can still work normally.
Voltage Stabilizing Module

This module provides a stable 48 V power supply for each fan.
Fan Speed Adjustment Module

This module is controlled by the system control unit. The system control unit issues signals to adjust the fan rotating speed through the fan speed adjustment module.
Fan Speed Reporting Module

This module reports information on the fan rotating speed to the system control unit.
9.2.4 Front Panel

On the front panel of the FAN, there are indicators and Fan warning label.

Figure 9-4 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN. Two fan frames are used for one subrack. Figure 9-4 Appearance of the front panel of the FAN
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
9-7
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the FAN. l l l l CRIT indicator, red, which indicates critical alarms MAJ indicator, orange, which indicates major alarms MIN indicator, yellow, which indicates minor alarms FAN indicator, red or green, which indicates the fan status
The CRIT, MAJ and MIN indicators on the FAN indicate the severity of alarms in the subrack. For details on indications of indicators, see A.2 Board Indicators.
Fan warning label

Fan warning label indicates that do not touch the fan leaves before the fan stops.
9.2.5 Valid Slots

The FAN can be housed in slot 39 or 40 of the subrack.

Specifications of the FAN board cover board dimensions, weight, power consumption and working voltage. Board dimensions (mm): 66.5 (height) x 278.4 (depth) x 492.0 (width) Weight (kg): 4.5 Power consumption (W) l l l Low rate: 18.0 Medium rate: 32.8 High rate: 81.4
Working voltage (V): -38.4 to -57.6 (-48 V power supply) -48.0 to -72.0 (-60 V power supply)
9-8
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
10 Filler Panel
10
About This Chapter
A filler panel is used to cover any idle slot in a subrack.
Filler Panel
10.1 Functions and Features A filler panel can be used to perform electromagnetic shielding, keep out foreign substances, and ensure proper ventilation. 10.2 Appearance and Valid Slots There is no indicator or interface on a filler panel.There are various dimensions for filler panels, and filler panels of different dimensions can be housed in different slots.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
10-1
10 Filler Panel
10.1 Functions and Features

A filler panel can be used to perform electromagnetic shielding, keep out foreign substances, and ensure proper ventilation. Main functions of a filler panel are as follows: l l l l Performs electromagnetic shielding and ensures that the subrack meets the requirement of electromagnetic radiation. Prevents foreign substances from getting into the subrack. Prevents internal voltage and current from being exposed. Ensures proper ventilation of cooling current inside the subrack.
10.2 Appearance and Valid Slots

There is no indicator or interface on a filler panel.There are various dimensions for filler panels, and filler panels of different dimensions can be housed in different slots.
Appearance
Figure 10-1 show appearances of filler panels of different types. Figure 10-1 Appearances of filler panels
1. Filler panel for a cross-connect board 2. Filler panel for an interface/system control board 3. Filler panel for a processing board 4. Filler panel for a service sub-board 5. Filler panel for a power supply board
10-2
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
10 Filler Panel
Valid Slots
Different types of filler panels are housed in different areas in subracks. Table 10-1 lists the valid slots for filler panels. Table 10-1 Valid slots for filler panels Filler Panel Filler panel for a cross-connect board Filler panel for an interface/system control board Filler panel for a processing board Filler panel for a service sub-board Filler panel for a power supply board Valid Slots Slots 9-10 Slots 19-26 and 29-38 Slots 1-8 and 11-18 Sub-slots on the MP1 Slots 27-28
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
10-3
11 Pluggable Optical Modules
11
About This Chapter
Pluggable Optical Modules
Optical interface boards for the OptiX PTN 3900 use the enhanced small form-factor pluggable (eSFP) optical module and the 10-gigabit small form-factor pluggable (XFP) optical module. The eSFP and XFP optical modules, which are protocol-independent optical transceivers applicable to optical communication, implement O/E and E/O conversion for signals, and support query of information such as the transceiver performance and manufacturer. 11.1 Appearance and Application The appearances and application scenarios of the eSFP and XFP optical modules are different. 11.2 Optical Module Labels Optical module labels, stuck on the back of optical modules, are used to distinguish different types of optical modules.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
11-1
11.1 Appearance and Application

The appearances and application scenarios of the eSFP and XFP optical modules are different.
Appearance
Figure 11-1 shows the appearance of the eSFP optical module; Figure 11-2 shows the appearance of the XFP optical module. Figure 11-1 Appearance of the eSFP optical module
Figure 11-2 Appearance of the XFP optical module
Application
Table 11-1 lists the boards where the eSFP optical module is applicable. Table 11-1 Boards where the eSFP optical module is applicable Board Type GE optical interface board FE optical interface board STM-4 optical interface board STM-1 optical interface board Board Name EG16, EG8, EFG2, EFG4 EFF8 POD41 POD41, AFO1, AD1, CD1
11-2
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
The XFP optical module is applicable to the 10GE optical interface board EX2.
11.2 Optical Module Labels

Optical module labels, stuck on the back of optical modules, are used to distinguish different types of optical modules. Figure 11-3 shows the optical module labels. Figure 11-3 Optical module labels
1.25G-80km-1550nm 34060360 Optical module part number
As shown in Table 11-2, different types of optical modules have different part numbers. Table 11-2 Part numbers and types of optical modules Optical Module Part Numbers 34060362 Optical interface type 10GBASE-SR (0.3 km) 34060313 10GBASE-LR (10 km) 10GBASE-LW (10 km) 34060322 10GBASE-ER (40 km) 10GBASE-EW (40 km) 34060361 10GBASE-ZR (80 km) 10GBASE-ZW (80 km) 34060286 1000BASE-SX (0.5 km) 34060473 1000BASE-LX (10 km)
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Optical Module Basic Information Optical Transceiver, XFP, 850 nm, 10.3 Gbit/s, LC, Multi-mode, 0.3 km Optical Transceiver, XFP, 1310 nm, 9.95 Gbit/ s to 10.71 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 10 km
Mapping Board EX2
Optical Transceiver, XFP, 1550 nm, 9.95 Gbit/ s to 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40 km
Optical transceiver, XFP, 1550 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 850 nm, 2.125 Gbit/ s (Multi rate), LC, Multi-mode, 0.5 km
EG16 EG8
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/ EFG2 s, LC, Single-mode, 10 km EFG4
11-3
Optical Module Part Numbers 34060298
Optical interface type 1000BASE-VX (40 km)
Optical Module Basic Information Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/ s, LC, Single-mode, 40 km Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, 1.25 Gbit/ s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1471 nm, 100 Mbit/ s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km
Mapping Board
34060360
1000BASE-ZX (80 km)
34060483
1000BASECWDM (80 km)
34060481
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1491 nm, 100 Mbit/ s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km
34060479
34060482
34060478
34060476
34060477
34060480
34060277
S-4.1 (15 km)
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM4, LC, Single-mode, 15 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM4, LC, Single-mode, 40 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, STM4, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM1, LC, Single-mode, 15 km
POD41
34060280
L-4.1 (40 km)
34060284
L-4.2 (80 km)
34060276
100BASE-FX (15 km)
EFF8 AFO1
11-4
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Optical Module Part Numbers
Optical interface type S-1.1 (15 km)
Optical Module Basic Information
Mapping Board AD1 CD1 POD41
34060281
100BASE-FX (40 km) L-1.1 (40 km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM1, LC, Single-mode, 40 km
34060282
100BASE-FX (80 km) L-1.2 (80 km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, STM1, LC, Single-mode, 80 km
34060475
1000BASE-BX (10 km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1490 nm/Rx 1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1490 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm, STM1, LC, Single-mode, 15 km
EG16 EG8 EFG2 EFG4 EFF8 AFO1 AD1 CD1 POD41
34060470
1000BASE-BX (10 km)
34060364
100BASE-BX (10 km) S-1.1 (15 km)
34060363
100BASE-BX (10 km) S-1.1 (15 km)
Optical Transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550 nm, STM1, LC, Single-mode, 15 km
34060329
100BASE-BX (40 km) L-1.1 (40 km)
34060328
100BASE-BX (40 km) L-1.1 (40 km)
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
11-5
12 Pluggable Electrical Module
12
Appearance
Pluggable Electrical Module
A pluggable electrical module is used at a GE SFP interface to transmit/receive GE electrical signals.
Figure 12-1 shows the appearance of the SFP electrical module. Figure 12-1 Appearance of the GE SFP electrical module
Part Number
Table 12-1 lists the part number and the type of the pluggable module. Table 12-1 Part number and type of electrical module Electrical Module Part Numbers 34100052 Electrical interface type 1000BASE-T Electrical Module Basic Information 1000BASE-T (RJ45) SFP Electrical Module, 100m Mapping Board
EG16 EG8 EFG2 EFG4
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
12-1
13 Cables
13
About This Chapter
13.1 Fiber This section mainly describes the types of fiber and connectors.
Cables
This chapter describes the cables used for the equipment. The cables include the fiber, power supply cables, grounding cables, service cables, management cables, clock cables, indicator and alarm cables.
13.2 Power Supply Cable and Grounding Cable The power supply cable and grounding cable include the cabinet power supply wire, subrack power supply wire, power supply wire that connects the external equipment, and cabinet door grounding cable. 13.3 Service Cable The service cable includes the Ethernet cable, 75-ohm 8 x E1 cable and 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable. 13.4 Management Cable The management cable includes straight through cable and crossover cable. 13.5 Clock Cable The clock cable includes the 75-ohm clock cable and 120-ohm clock cable. The clock cable is used to input and output external clock signals. 13.6 Cabinet Indicator Cable The cabinet indicator cable is used to connect the SCA board on the OptiX PTN 3900 and the cabinet indicators. It transmits the indicator signals output by the SCA to the cabinet indicator. 13.7 Alarm Input/Output Cable The alarm input cable is used to input the alarm signals of the external equipment to the OptiX PTN 3900 equipment. The alarm output cable is used to output the alarm signals to the central alarm monitoring equipment.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
13-1
13 Cables
13.1 Fiber
This section mainly describes the types of fiber and connectors. 13.1.1 Types of Fiber The OptiX PTN 3900 equipment can use various types of fiber. 13.1.2 Connector The OptiX PTN 3900 equipment can use various types of connectors.
13.1.1 Types of Fiber

The OptiX PTN 3900 equipment can use various types of fiber. Table 13-1 lists the types of fiber used by the OptiX PTN 3900 equipment. Table 13-1 Types of Fiber Usage Connects the OptiX PTN 3900 to the ODF or connects the interface board of the OptiX PTN 3900 to other equipment Connector 1 LC/PC Connector 2 FC/PC Cable 2 mm singlemode optical fiber 2 mm multimode optical fiber LC/PC SC/PC 2 mm singlemode optical fiber 2 mm multimode optical fiber Connects fibers between the OptiX PTN 3900 LC/PC LC/PC 2 mm singlemode optical fiber 2 mm multimode optical fiber Length 6 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m 1.5 m, 3 m, 5 m, 6 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50m
Select the fiber connector and the fiber length according to the on-site survey.
13.1.2 Connector
The OptiX PTN 3900 equipment can use various types of connectors. The fiber connectors can be classified into three types.
13 Cables
l l
Interfaces on the boards require the LC/PC optical connectors. Figure 13-1 shows the LC/ PC optical connector. The ODF at the client side uses the FC/PC or SC/PC optical connectors. Figure 13-2 and Figure 13-3 show the corresponding FC/PC and SC/PC optical connectors.
Table 13-2 lists details of the three fiber connectors. Table 13-2 Fiber Connector Fiber Connector LC/PC FC/PC SC/PC Description Plug-in square fiber connector/protruding polished Round fiber connector/protruding polished Square fiber connector/protruding polished
LC/PC
Figure 13-1 shows the appearance of the LC/PC optical connector. Figure 13-1 LC/PC optical connector
The axial operation instead of rotation is required to insert or remove the LC/PC optical connector. The specific operation is as follows: l l To insert the fiber into the LC/PC connector, align the head of the fiber with the optical interface, and then push the fiber with proper strength into the connector. To remove the LC/PC fiber, first press the clip, and then push fiber connector inward slightly, and pull out the connector.
FC/PC
Figure 13-2 shows the appearance of the FC/PC optical connector.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
13-3
13 Cables
Figure 13-2 FC/PC optical connector
When inserting or removing the FC/PC optical connector, do as follows. l To insert the fiber into the FC/PC connector, align the head of the fiber with the optical interface on the optical interface board carefully, to avoid damaging the internal ceramic pipe. After inserting the fiber to the bottom of the optical interface, clockwise rotate the external screw to tighten the fiber into the optical interface. To remove the fiber, first anticlockwise rotate the external screw of the optical interface. When the screw is loosened, remove the fiber with proper strength from the optical interface.
SC/PC
Figure 13-3 shows the appearance of the SC/PC optical connector. Figure 13-3 SC/PC optical connector
When inserting or removing the SC/PC optical connector, do as follows. l l To insert the fiber into the SC/PC connector, align the head of the fiber with the optical interface, and then push the fiber with proper strength into the connector. To remove the fiber, first press the clip, and then push the fiber connector inward slightly, and pull out the connector.
13.2 Power Supply Cable and Grounding Cable

The power supply cable and grounding cable include the cabinet power supply wire, subrack power supply wire, power supply wire that connects the external equipment, and cabinet door grounding cable.
13 Cables
13.2.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power Cable The -48 V, BGND and PGND power cables are used to supply power to the equipment in the cabinet. One end of the power cable connects to the power distribution cabinet and grounding bar in the equipment room, and the other end connects to the power distribution unit at the cabinet top. 13.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable The cabinet door grounding cable is used to ground the front door, rear door and side panels. The cables are correctly connected before delivery. 13.2.3 Subrack Power Cable The subrack power cable connects the power distribution unit (PDU) at the cabinet top and the PIU board on the subrack. The -48 V power supply is led out from the top of the cabinet to the subrack.
13.2.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power Cable

The -48 V, BGND and PGND power cables are used to supply power to the equipment in the cabinet. One end of the power cable connects to the power distribution cabinet and grounding bar in the equipment room, and the other end connects to the power distribution unit at the cabinet top.
Structure
Figure 13-4 shows the structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and that of the BGND power grounding cable. Figure 13-4 Structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and BGND power grounding cable
Bare crimping terminal (JG2) Bare crimping connector (OT)
Figure 13-5 shows the structure of the cabinet PGND protection grounding cable, and Figure 13-6 shows the appearance of the cabinet PGND protection grounding cable.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
13-5
13 Cables
Figure 13-5 Structure of the cabinet PGND protection grounding cable (JG2&OT)
Cable tie Bare crimping terminal (JG2) Heat-shrink tube L = 3 cm W Main label
Heat-shrink tube
Bare crimping connector (OT)
Figure 13-6 Appearance of the cabinet PGND protection grounding cable (JG2&OT)
Technical Specifications
Item Terminal Specification Bare crimping terminal-JG2 type-25mm2-M8-95A-tin plating Bare crimping terminal-OT type-25mm2-M8-tin platingbare ring terminal
13-6
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
13 Cables
13.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable

The cabinet door grounding cable is used to ground the front door, rear door and side panels. The cables are correctly connected before delivery.
Structure
Figure 13-7 shows the structure of the cabinet door grounding cable. Figure 13-8 shows the appearance of the cabinet door grounding cable. Figure 13-7 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable
Main label Bare crimping connector (OT)
Heat-shrink tube
Figure 13-8 Appearance of the cabinet door grounding cable
Item Connector Cable Type Fireproof class
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Specification Bare crimping terminal-OT-10mm2-M6-tin plating-bare terminalWire-600V-UL1015-10AWG-50A-yellow and green CM
13-7
13 Cables
Item Length
Specification 0.3 m
13.2.3 Subrack Power Cable

The subrack power cable connects the power distribution unit (PDU) at the cabinet top and the PIU board on the subrack. The -48 V power supply is led out from the top of the cabinet to the subrack.
Structure
Figure 13-9 shows the structure of the subrack power cable. Figure 13-9 Structure of the subrack power cable
Bare crimping terminal Main label
NOTE
Select subrack power cables with different connectors according to the different power boxes.
Item Bare crimping terminal Cable Type Color Specification OT2 type-10mm2-M6-60A-tin plating Electronic/electric cable-450V/750VH07Z-K-10mm2 Blue and black
13.3 Service Cable

The service cable includes the Ethernet cable, 75-ohm 8 x E1 cable and 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable. 13.3.1 Ethernet Cable Ethernet cable is also called network cable. It is classified into straight through network cable and crossover network cable based on the different connection sequence of the copper wire in the cable. 13.3.2 75-ohm 8 x E1 Cable
13 Cables
The 75-ohm 8 x E1 cable is used to input and output E1 signals. 13.3.3 120-ohm 8 x E1 Cable The 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable is used to input and output E1 signals.
13.3.1 Ethernet Cable

Ethernet cable is also called network cable. It is classified into straight through network cable and crossover network cable based on the different connection sequence of the copper wire in the cable.
Structure
The straight through cable and crossover cable both are standard shielded cable and adopt RJ-45 connector, as shown in Figure 13-10. Figure 13-10 RJ-45 connector
PIN #8 PIN #1
The straight through cable is used for the communication among the OptiX PTN 3900 equipment, the NM computer and the Ethernet. Figure 13-11 shows the structure of the straight through cable, and Figure 13-12 shows the appearance of straight through cable. Figure 13-11 Structure of the straight through cable
RJ-45 network interface connector
Label 1 W
Main label
Label 2 8 1
8 1 X1
X2
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
13-9
13 Cables
Figure 13-12 Appearance of the straight through cable
The crossover cable is used to directly connect the NMS computer to the OptiX PTN 3900 equipment. Figure 13-13 shows the structure of the crossover cable, and Figure 13-14 shows the appearance of crossover cable. Figure 13-13 Structure of the crossover cable
RJ-45 network interface connector Label 1 Main label Network cable Label 2
8 1 X1 X2
13-10
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
13 Cables
Figure 13-14 Appearance of the crossover cable
NOTE
Wire 1 and wire 3 of one end of the crossover cable must be respectively connected to wire 3 and wire 1 of the other end, and wire 2 and wire 6 of one end of the crossover cable must be respectively connected to wire 6 and wire 2 of the other end.
Pin Assignment
Figure 13-15 shows the pin assignment relations of the straight through cable. Figure 13-15 Pin assignment of the straight through cable
Connector X1 Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Pin 7 Pin 8 White or orange Orange White or green Blue White or blue Green White or brown Connector X2 White or orange Orange White or green Blue White or blue Green White or brown Brown Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Pin 7 Pin 8
Brown
Table 13-3 lists the pin assignment of the straight through cable.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
13-11
13 Cables
Table 13-3 Pin assignment of the straight through cable Connector X1 X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.4 X1.5 X1.7 X1.8 Connector X2 X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.6 X2.4 X2.5 X2.7 X2.8 Color White or orange Orange White or green Green Blue White or blue White or brown Brown Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Relation Twisted pair
Figure 13-16 shows the pin assignment relations of the crossover cable. Figure 13-16 Structure of the crossover cable
Connector X1 Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Pin 7 Pin 8 White or orange Orange White or green Blue White or blue Green White or brown Connector X2 White or green Green White or orange Blue White or blue Orange White or brown Brown Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Pin 7 Pin 8
Brown
Table 13-4 lists the pin assignment of the crossover cable. Table 13-4 Pin assignment of the crossover cable Connector X1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.1
13-12
Connector X2 X2.2 X2.1 X2.3
Color Orange White or orange White or green
Relation Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
13 Cables
Connector X1 X1.2 X1.4 X1.5 X1.7 X1.8
Connector X2 X2.6 X2.4 X2.5 X2.7 X2.8
Color Green Blue White or blue White or brown Brown
Relation
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Table 13-5 lists the technical specifications of the straight through cable. Table 13-6 lists the technical specifications of crossover cable. For details on connectors X1 and X2 listed in the following table, refer to Figure 13-11 and Figure 13-12. Table 13-5 Technical specifications of the straight through cable Item Connector X1/X2 Specification Network interface connector-crystal model connector-8PIN-8bitshielded-connector-24 to 26AWG-CAT 6/used with SFTP network cable l Adaptation wire gauge: 24 to 26AWG l Cable type: CAT 6/used with lead shielded twisted cable Cable type Communication cable-10015 ohms-CAT5E-SFTP 24AWG-8 coresPANTONE 445U l Transmission resistance: 10015 ohms l Wire gauge: CAT5E SFTP 24AWG l Color: Pantone 430U Number of cores Fireproof class 8 CM
Table 13-6 Technical specifications of the crossover cable Item Connector X1/X2 Specification Network interface connector-crystal model connector-8PIN-8bitshielded-24 to 26AWG-CAT 6/used with SFTP network cable l Adaptation wire gauge: 24 to 26AWG l Cable type: CAT 6/used with lead shielded twisted cable
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
13-13
13 Cables
Item Cable type
Specification Communication cable-100 15 ohms-CAT5E-SFTP 24AWG-8 coresPANTONE 646U l Transmission resistance: 10015 ohms l Wire gauge: CAT5E SFTP 24AWG l Color: Pantone 430U
Number of cores Fireproof class
8 CM
13.3.2 75-ohm 8 x E1 Cable

The 75-ohm 8 x E1 cable is used to input and output E1 signals. Use the DB44 connector at one end to connect the cable to the 75-ohm 8 x E1 electrical interface board. Use a connector to connect the other end to the digital distribution frame (DDF). The connector should be made according to the on-site requirements.
Structure
Figure 13-17 shows the structure of the 75-ohm 8 x E1 cable. Figure 13-17 Structure of the 75-ohm E1 cable
A-A
Pos.1
Cable connectorD type-44PINmale
Pos.44
Main label W X
Pin Assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable

Table 13-7 list the pin assignment of the 75-ohm 8 x E1 cable.
13-14
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
13 Cables
Table 13-7 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable Connector pin 38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 Shell Cable W Core Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip External braid shield layer 8 T4 6 T3 4 T2 2 T1 7 R4 5 R3 3 R2 No. 1 R1 Remarks Connector pin 34 19 33 18 32 17 31 16 11 26 10 25 9 24 8 7 Cable W Core Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip 16 T8 14 T7 12 T6 10 T5 15 R8 13 R7 11 R6 No. 9 R5 Remarks
Technical Specifications of the 75-ohm E1 cable

Item Connector X Cable type Fireproof class Number of cores Cover diameterinsulation diameterconductor diameter Specification Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male Coaxial cable-SYFVZ-LC-75-1x16(A)-75 ohm-12.4 mm-1.2 mm-0.254 mm-Pantone Warm Gray 1U CM 16 12.4 mm-1.2 mm-0.254 mm
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
13-15
13 Cables
CAUTION
The pin assignment table for the E1 cable is placed in the same packing case with the cable. Do not discard it before installation.
13.3.3 120-ohm 8 x E1 Cable

The 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable is used to input and output E1 signals. Use the DB44 connector at one end to connect the cable to the 120-ohm E1 electrical interface board. Use a connector to connect the other end to the DDF. The connector should be made according to the on-site requirements.
Structure
Figure 13-18 shows the structure of the 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable. Figure 13-18 Structure of the 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable
A-A
Pos.1
Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male
Pos.44
Lable 1
Lable 2
Main lable W1
X W2
Figure 13-19 shows the appearance of the 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable.
13-16
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
13 Cables
Figure 13-19 Appearance of the 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable
Pin Assignment
Table 13-8 lists the pin assignment of the 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable. Table 13-8 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable Conne ctor pin 15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 11 26 10 25 9 24 Cable W1 Core Blue White Orange White Green White Brown White Grey White Blue Red Orange Red No. Twiste d pair Twiste d pair Twiste d pair Twiste d pair Twiste d pair Twiste d pair Twiste d pair Remark s Tx1 Connect or pin 38 23 Tx2 37 22 Tx3 36 21 Tx4 35 20 Tx5 34 19 Tx6 33 18 Tx7 32 17 Cable W2 Core Blue White Orange White Green White Brown White Grey White Blue Red Orange Red No. Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Rx1 Remarks
Rx2
Rx3
Rx4
Rx5
Rx6
Rx7
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
13-17
13 Cables
Conne ctor pin 8 7 Shell
Cable W1 Core Green Red No. Twiste d pair
Remark s Tx8
Connect or pin 31 16 Shell
Cable W2 Core Green Red No. Twisted pair
Remarks
Rx8
External braid shield layer
External braid shield layer
Item Connector X Cable type Number of cores Inner conductor diameter Fireproof class Specification Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male Communication cable-120 ohms-SEYVP-24AWG-16 corePANTONE 430U 16 0.4 mm CM
13.4 Management Cable

The management cable includes straight through cable and crossover cable. 13.4.1 Straight Through Cable The straight through cable is used for the communication among the OptiX PTN 3900 equipment, the NMS computer and the Ethernet. 13.4.2 Crossover Cable The crossover cable is used to directly connect the NMS computer to the OptiX PTN 3900 equipment.
13.4.1 Straight Through Cable

The straight through cable is used for the communication among the OptiX PTN 3900 equipment, the NMS computer and the Ethernet. For the description of the straight through cable, refer to 13.3.1 Ethernet Cable.
13.4.2 Crossover Cable

The crossover cable is used to directly connect the NMS computer to the OptiX PTN 3900 equipment. For the description of the crossover cable, refer to 13.3.1 Ethernet Cable.
13 Cables
13.5 Clock Cable

The clock cable includes the 75-ohm clock cable and 120-ohm clock cable. The clock cable is used to input and output external clock signals. 13.5.1 External Clock Cable The 75-ohm clock cable uses the angled SMB connector. The 120-ohm clock cable uses the RJ-45 connector.
13.5.1 External Clock Cable

The 75-ohm clock cable uses the angled SMB connector. The 120-ohm clock cable uses the RJ-45 connector.
Structure
Figure 13-20 shows the connector structure of the 75-ohm clock cable. Figure 13-20 Connector structure of the 75-ohm clock cable
Figure 13-21 shows the connector structure of the 120-ohm clock cable. Figure 13-21 Connector structure of the 120-ohm clock cable
PIN #8 PIN #1
Pin Assignment
Table 13-9 shows the pin assignment of the cable.
13 Cables
Table 13-9 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm clock cable Connector pin Relat ion Description External Clock Mode External Time Mode (1PPS + Time Information ) 1 2 3 6 4 5 7 8 Twist ed pair Twist ed pair Twist ed pair Twist ed pair Twist ed pair Twist ed pair Twist ed pair Twist ed pair Negative receive end of CLK Positive receive end of CLK Unspecified Unspecified Negative transmit end of CLK Positive transmit end of CLK Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified Negative of 1PPS signals Positive of 1PPS signals Grounding end Grounding end Negative of time information Positive of time information External Time Mode (DCLS) Unspecified Unspecified Negative of DCLS signals Positive of DCLS signals Grounding end Grounding end Unspecified Unspecified
Item Connector of the 120-ohm clock cable Specification Network interface connector-8PIN-8 bit-shielded-crystal model connector
13.6 Cabinet Indicator Cable

The cabinet indicator cable is used to connect the SCA board on the OptiX PTN 3900 and the cabinet indicators. It transmits the indicator signals output by the SCA to the cabinet indicator.
Structure
Figure 13-22 shows the structure of the cabinet indicator cable. Figure 13-23 shows the appearance of the cabinet indicator cable.
13-20
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
13 Cables
Figure 13-22 Structure of the cabinet indicator cable

Heat-shrink tube Label A-A 8 1 Main label Heat-shrink tube W X1 A X4 X5 X2 X3 B B-B 1 2
Figure 13-23 Appearance of the cabinet indicator cable
Pin Assignment
Table 13-10 lists the pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable. Table 13-10 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable Connector X1 X1.4 X1.5 X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Connector X2/X3/X4/X5 X2.2 X2.1 X3.2 X3.1 X4.2 X4.1
Relation Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair
Label Print Green
Red
Orange
13-21
13 Cables
Connector X1 X1.7 X1.8
Connector X2/X3/X4/X5 X5.2 X5.1
Relation Twisted pair
Label Print Yellow
Item Connector X1 Connector X2/X3/X4/X5 Cable type Number of cores Fireproof class Core diameter Specification Network interface connector-8PIN-8 bit-shieldedcrystal model connector Common plug-2PIN-single row/2.5 mm Twisted pair cable-120 ohms-SEYPVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 core-PANTONE 430U 8 CM 0.5mm
13.7 Alarm Input/Output Cable

The alarm input cable is used to input the alarm signals of the external equipment to the OptiX PTN 3900 equipment. The alarm output cable is used to output the alarm signals to the central alarm monitoring equipment. One end of the alarm input/output cable uses an RJ-45 connector to connect to the alarm input/ output interface of the equipment. The other end uses a connector to connect to the external equipment or central alarm monitoring equipment. The connector should be made according to the on-site equipment.
Structure
Figure 13-24 shows the structure of the alarm input/output cable connector. Figure 13-24 Structure of the alarm input/output cable connector
13-22
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
13 Cables
Pin Assignment
Table 13-11 and Table 13-12 lists the pin assignment of the alarm input/output cable. Table 13-11 Pin assignment of the alarm input(ALMI1) Connect or 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Color White and orange Orange White and green Blue White and blue Green White and brown Brown Alarm Input Positive for alarm input 1 Negative for alarm input 1 Positive for alarm input 2 Positive for alarm input 3 Negative for alarm input 3 Negative for alarm input 2 Positive for alarm input 4 Negative for alarm input 4
Table 13-12 Pin assignment of the alarm input(ALMI2) Connect or 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Color White and orange Orange White and green Blue White and blue Green White and brown Brown Alarm Input Positive for alarm input 5 Negative for alarm input 5 Positive for alarm input 6 Positive for alarm input 7 Negative for alarm input 7 Negative for alarm input 6 Positive for alarm input 8 Negative for alarm input 8
Item Connector Specification Network interface connector-8PIN-8 bit-shielded-crystal model connector
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
13-23
A Indicators
A
A.2 Board Indicators This section describes the board indicators and their indications.
Indicators
This chapter describes the board indicators for the OptiX PTN 3900 and their indications. A.1 Cabinet Indicators This section describes the ETSI cabinet indicators for the OptiX PTN 3900.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
A-1
A Indicators
A.1 Cabinet Indicators

This section describes the ETSI cabinet indicators for the OptiX PTN 3900. Indicator Name Power indicator, green, which indicates whether the power supply is normal Description When the indicator is lit, it indicates that the power is supplied to the equipment. When the indicator is unlit, no power is supplied to the equipment. Critical alarm indicator, red When the indicator is lit, it indicates that critical alarms are generated in the equipment. When the indicator is unlit, it indicates that no critical alarms are generated in the equipment. Major alarm indicator, orange When the indicator is lit, it indicates that major alarms are generated in the equipment. When the indicator is unlit, it indicates that no major alarms are generated in the equipment. Minor alarm indicator, yellow When the indicator is lit, it indicates that minor alarms are generated in the equipment. When the indicator is unlit, it indicates that no minor alarms are generated in the equipment.
A.2 Board Indicators

This section describes the board indicators and their indications.
Index of Indicators
For boards and their indicators, see Boards and Their Indicators. For board status indicators, see: l l l l
A-2
Description of the Working Status Indicator (STAT) Description of the Service Activation Status and Board Working/Protection Status Indicator (ACT) Description of the Program Status Indicator (PROG) Description of the Service Status Indicator (SRV)
A Indicators
l l l l
Description of the Synchronization Status Indicator (SYNC) Description of the Power Supply Board Fault Indicator (ALM) Description of the Fan State Indicator(FAN) Description of the Power Supply Status Indicator (PWRA/PWRB)
For service port status indicators, see: l l l Service Port Connection Status Indicator (LINK) Description of the Service Interface Transmitting/Receiving Status Indicator (ACT) Description of the Interface Connection and Data Transmitting/Receiving Status Indicators (L/A)
For system alarm indicators, see: l l l l Description of the Alarm Cutting Indicator (ALMC) Description of the Critical Alarm Indicator (CRIT) Description of the Major Alarm Indicator (MAJ) Description of the Minor Alarm Indicator (MIN)
For the start status indicator combination in each phase when the processing board, service subboard, and system control board are started, see Description of the Start Status Indicator Combination on the Board.
Boards and Their Indicators

Board EG16 EG8 MP1 MD1 MQ1 CD1 AD1 ETFC EFG2 EFG4 EFF8 EX2 AFO1 POD41 SCA
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
Indicator STAT, ACT, SRV, PROG STAT, ACT, SRV, PROG STAT, PROG STAT, ACT, SRV STAT, ACT, SRV STAT, ACT, SRV STAT, ACT, SRV STAT, ACT, SRV, LINK, ACT STAT, ACT, SRV, L/A1, L/A2 STAT, ACT, SRV, L/A1 to L/A4 STAT, ACT, SRV, L/A1 to L/A8 STAT, ACT, SRV, L/A1, L/A2 STAT, ACT, SRV STAT, ACT, SRV STAT, ACT, SRV, PROG
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. A-3
A Indicators
Board XCS PIU FAN CMR2 CMR4
Indicator STAT, ACT, SRV, PROG, SYNC, ALMC PWRA, PWRB, ALM CRIT, MAJ, MIN, FAN STAT STAT
Description of the Working Status Indicator (STAT)

Status On (green) On (red) On (orange) Off Description The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. The interface board or service sub-board is not loaded with the logic. l No power is input. l The board is not running.
NOTE If the logic is loaded to the board but the board is not created, the board cannot be activated. In this case, the STAT indicator is on (green), but the SRV indicator is off.
Description of the Service Activation Status and Board Working/Protection Status Indicator (ACT)
Status On (green) Description l Services of the processing board or service sub-board are in the active state, and the board is working. l The SCA or XCS is in the working state. l The MD1/MQ1 configured in a TPS protection group is in the working state. Blinking (green) at 100 ms internals Off NE databases are backed up in batch (this is available on only the SCA). l Services on the processing board or service sub-board are not activated. l The MD1/MQ1 configured in a TPS protection group is in the backup state or protected state.
A-4
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
A Indicators
Status
Description
CAUTION When the ACT indicator on the protection system control board is flashing, it indicates that the working system control board is backing up databases in batch to the protection system control board. At this time, do not reset the working system control board or remove and then insert the working system control board. Otherwise, the equipment may work abnormally.
Description of the Program Status Indicator (PROG)

Status On (green) Description l The board software is being initialized. l The board software is normally initialized, and the board software is running normally. On (red) l The memory self-check fails. l The board software or the logic file is lost. l Loading of the board software fails. Blinking (green) at 100 ms internals Blinking (green) at 300 ms internals Blinking (red) at 100 ms internals Off Loading of the board software is in process. The BIOS is guiding the upper-layer software. The BIOS self-check fails. No power is input.
Description of the Service Status Indicator (SRV)

Status On (green) Description Services are running normally and no service-related alarm occurs (including the situation where the board is activated but not configured with services). A critical or major service-related alarm occurs. A minor or remote service-related alarm occurs. l No power is input. l The board is not running.
On (red) On (orange) Off
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
A-5
A Indicators
Description of the Synchronization Status Indicator (SYNC)

Status On (green) Description l The clock works in free-run mode and the system clock priority list is not configured. By default, the system clock priority list contains only internal sources. l The clock works in locked mode and is tracing a clock source other than the internal source in the priority list. l The system clock is working in time synchronization mode, and the PTP time and system clock are in the tracing state. On (red) l The system clock priority list is configured. All the clock sources, however, are lost except the internal clock sources. The clock works in holdover mode or free-run mode. l The system clock is working in time synchronization mode, but no synchronization source is available. The system clock and PTP time are working in holdover or free-run mode.
Description of the Power Supply Board Fault Indicator (ALM)

Status On (red) Off Description The power supply board is faulty. The power supply board is normal.
Description of the Fan State Indicator(FAN)

Status On (green) On (red) Description The fans are working normally. l A fan is faulty. l A fan is working abnormally. Off The fans are not powered.
Description of the Power Supply Status Indicator (PWRA/PWRB)

Status On (green) Off Description The power supply is normal. l The power supply is lost. l The power supply fails.
A-6
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
A Indicators
Service Port Connection Status Indicator (LINK)

Status On (green) Off Description The service port is correctly connected to the cable. The service port fails to be connected to the cable.
Description of the Service Interface Transmitting/Receiving Status Indicator (ACT)

Status Blinking (orange) Off Description The service interface is transmitting or receiving data. l The service port is not connected to the cable. l The service port is incorrectly connected to the cable.
Description of the Interface Connection and Data Transmitting/Receiving Status Indicators (L/A)
Status On (green) Blinking (orange) Off Description The service port is correctly connected to the fiber/cable. The service port is correctly connected to the fiber/cable, and the data are transmitted/received at the port. The service port fails to be connected to the fiber/cable.
Description of the Alarm Cutting Indicator (ALMC)

Status On (red) Off Description The audible alarm of the equipment is disabled. The audible alarm of the equipment is enabled. When an alarm associated with the audible function is reported, sound is generated to indicate the alarm.
Description of the Critical Alarm Indicator (CRIT)

Status On (red) Off Description Critical alarms are generated. No critical alarm is generated.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
A-7
A Indicators
Description of the Major Alarm Indicator (MAJ)

Status On (red) Off Description Major alarms are generated. No major alarm is generated.
Description of the Minor Alarm Indicator (MIN)

Status On (yellow) Off Description Minor alarms are generated. No minor alarm is generated.
Description of the Start Status Indicator Combination on the Board

From power on to normal running, the processing board, service sub-board, cross-connect board, and system control board go through various statuses. Table A-1 shows the indicator combination corresponding to these statuses. Table A-1 Start status indicator combination SN Status Indicator STAT 1 2 3 The board is not powered on. The BIOS is being started. The BIOS is started, and guides and loads the board software. The upper-layer software is being initialized. The upper-layer software initialization is complete, but the board is not running. The board is running. Off Off Off PROG Off Green Blinking (green) Green ACT Off Off Off SRV Off Off Off
Green
Off
Off
Green
Green
Off
Off
Green
Green
Off/Green/ Blinking (green)a
Always onb
A-8
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
A Indicators
SN
Status
Indicator STAT PROG ACT SRV
NOTE a: When the board is running, the ACT indicator may be off, on (green), or flashing (green). When services are normal, the indicator is on (green). For other statuses, see Description of the Service Activation Status and Board Working/Protection Status Indicator (ACT). b: When the board is running, the SRV indicator may be in red, orange, or green. When services are normal, the indicator is green. For other statuses of the indicator, see Description of the Service Status Indicator (SRV).
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
A-9
B Labels
Labels
On the OptiX PTN 3900, safety labels, optical module labels and engineering labels are stuck. B.1 Safety Label Various safety labels are stuck on the equipment. This section describes positions and indications of these safety labels. B.2 Engineering Labels The engineering labels should be made according to the the local engineering specifications or Huawei engineering specifications.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
B-1
B Labels
B.1 Safety Label

Various safety labels are stuck on the equipment. This section describes positions and indications of these safety labels. B.1.1 Labels Labels are present on the subrack and boards. B.1.2 Label Position Some labels such as the ESD protection label and subrack grounding label are stuck on the subrack.
B.1.1 Labels
Labels are present on the subrack and boards. Table B-1 Labels Label Type ESD protection label Indication The equipment is electrostatic sensitive.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER RADIATION
Laser safety class
The label indicates the class of the laser source.
Subrack grounding label
This label indicates the grounding position.
! ATTENTION
CLEAN PERIODICALLY
Regular cleaning label
Regularly clean the air filter.
DON'T TOUCH THE FANLEAVESBEFORE THEYSLOW DOWN !
Fan warning label
Do not touch the fan leaves before the fan stops.
Multi-channel power supply label No hot plug label
Multiple channels of power supply are available. Do not insert or remove the component when the power is on.
Do not hot plug this unit !
B-2
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
B Labels
Label
/QUALIFICATION CARD
Type Qualification label
Indication The equipment is qualified.
HUAWEI
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
MADE IN CHINA
Product nameplate label

OptiX PTN 3900
POWER RATING: -48-60V;52A Class 1 Laser Product
The label suggests the product name and certification.
N14036
HUAWEI TECHNOLGIES CO.,LTD.
MADE IN CHINA
B.1.2 Label Position

Some labels such as the ESD protection label and subrack grounding label are stuck on the subrack. Figure B-1 shows where labels are stuck on the subrack. Figure B-1 Position of labels on the subrack
OptiX PTN 3900
POWER RATING: -48-60V;52A
Class 1 Laser Product
N14036
HUAWEI TECHNOLGIES CO.,LTD.
MADE IN CHINA
/ QUALIFICATION CARD
HUAWEI
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
MADE IN CHINA
! ATTENTION
CLEAN PERIODICALLY
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
B-3
B Labels
B.2 Engineering Labels

The engineering labels should be made according to the the local engineering specifications or Huawei engineering specifications. The engineering labels should be made according to the the local engineering specifications or Huawei engineering specifications. Table B-2 lists the Huawei engineering specifications for engineering labels. Table B-2 Huawei specifications for engineering labels Label Engineer ing labels for power cables Illustration
TO: A01 B08 TO: B03
Indication (1) On the loaded cabinet side, the label marked "A01/B08--48V2" on the cable indicates that the cable is used for the -48V2 DC power supply, which comes from the eighth connector on the second row of the -48 V bus bar in the cabinet on Row A, and Column 01 in the equipment room. (2) On the distribution unit side, the label marked "B03--48V2" indicates that the cable is -48V2 DC power supply, which comes from the loaded cabinet on Row B, Column 03 in the equipment room. For PGND and BGND, it is only necessary to give the row and column of the power distribution unit, instead of the specific serial number of the terminal block on the copper bar. The external alarm cables are connected to the first subscriber cabinet of each row (used for power distribution). Engineering labels stuck on the first cabinet of each row should indicate which equipment is using the access terminal. Engineering labels are not needed on the equipment side unless there are special requirements. The label marked "A01" indicates that the alarm cable connects the first cabinet and the cabinet on Row A, Column 01 in the equipment room.
-48V2
-48V2
(1)
(2)
(1) Label on the cable at the loaded cabinet side, which indicates the position of the cable at the power distribution cabinet side (2) Label on the cable at the power distribution cabinet side, which indicates the position of the cable at the loaded cabinet side
Engineer ing labels for alarm external cables
B-4
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
B Labels
Label Engineer ing labels for Ethernet cables
Illustration
Indication "A01-03-06-05" indicates that one end of the Ethernet cable is connected to Ethernet Port 05, Slot 6, Frame 03 of the cabinet on Row A, Column 01 in the equipment room. "B02-03-12" indicates that the other end of the Ethernet cable is connected to Ethernet Port 12, Frame 03 of the cabinet on Row B, Column 02 in the equipment room. No slot number is specified. "A01-01-05-05-R" indicates that the local end of the fiber is connected with Optical Receiving Interface 05 on Slot 5, Frame 01 in the cabinet on Row A, Column 01 in the equipment room. "G01-01-01-01-T" indicates that the opposite end of the fiber is connected with Optical Transmitting Interface 01 on Slot 01, Frame 01 in the cabinet on Row G, Column 01 in the equipment room. "ODF-G01-01-01-R" indicates that the local end of the fiber is connected to the optical receiving terminal on Row 01, Column 01 of the ODF in Row G Column 01 in the equipment room. "A01-01-05-05R" indicates that the other end of the fiber is connected to optical receiving interface 5 on Slot 05, frame 01 in the cabinet on Row A, Column 01 in the equipment room. "A01-03-01-01-R" indicates that local end of the trunk cable connects to the receiving terminal of Trunk Cable 01 in Slot 01, Frame 03 of the cabinet on Row A, Column 01 in the equipment room. "DDFG01-01-01-AR" indicates that the opposite end of the trunk cable connects the receiving terminal of Direction A (connected to optical network equipment) on Row 01, Column 01 of the DDF on Row G and Column 01 in the equipment room.
Engineer ing labels for fibers that connect equipme nt
Labels for fibers that connect the equipme nt to the ODF Labels for trunk cables that connect the equipme nt to the ODF
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
B-5
C Power Consumption and Weight
C
Board TN81EG16 TN82EG16 EG8 TN81EX2 TN82EX2 MP1 MD1 MQ1 CD1 AD1 ETFC EFF8 EFG2 EFG4 POD41 AFO1
Power Consumption and Weight
This chapter lists the power consumption and weight of each board used for the OptiX PTN 3900. Table C-1 lists the power consumption and weight of each board used for the OptiX PTN 3900. Table C-1 Power consumption and weight Weight (kg) 2.40 2.40 1.24 2.08 1.22 1.15 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.35 0.55 0.64 0.52 0.43 0.55 0.78 Power Consumption (W) 152.2 151.7 59.4 163.9 64.6 43.1 20.7 27.9 26.4 22.0 15.0 16.3 8.8 8.0 11.6 27.2
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
C-1
C Power Consumption and Weight
Board D12 D75 TN81SCA TN82SCA TN81XCS TN82XCS TN83XCS CMR2 CMR4 PIU FAN
Weight (kg) 0.56 0.57 0.93 0.96 2.45 2.48 2.40 0.80 0.90 1.50 4.50
Power Consumption (W) 0.1 0.1 25.0 26.7 65.4 73.5 46.1 0.2 0.2 9.3 l Low rate: 18.0 l Medium rate: 32.8 l High rate: 81.4
C-2
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
D Board Configuration Parameters
D
l l
Board Configuration Parameters
You can use the U2000 to configure each parameter of the processing board, interface board, cross-connect and system control board.
Parameters of the Processing Board

The configurable parameters of the processing board are the J0, J1, J2, C2, V5, SDH interface, Ethernet interface, automatic laser shutdown (ALS) and spare timeslot recovery value. The J0 byte is continually transmitted to carry section access point identifiers, according to which the receive end verifies the constant connection to the intended transmit end. It is recommended to set the J0 byte to "0". The J1 byte is the path tracing byte. The transmit end successively transmits the higher order access point identifiers, according to which the receive end verifies the constant connection to the intended transmit end. When detecting mismatch of the J1 bytes, the receive end inserts the HP_TIM alarm in the corresponding path. The J2 byte is a VC-12 path tracing byte. The transmit end successively transmits the lower order access point identifiers based on the negotiation of the two ends. According to these access point identifiers, the receive end verifies the constant connection to the intended transmit end in this path. The C2 byte is the signal label byte, which indicates the multiplexing structure of the VC frames and the payload property. The received C2 should be consistent with the transmitted C2. If the C2 bytes are mismatched, the local end inserts the HP_SLM alarm in the corresponding VC-4 path. Table D-1 lists the mapping relation between the service type and setting of the C2. Table D-1 Mapping relation between the service type and C2 byte Input Service Type TUG structure ATM mapping HDLC, PPP framed signal mapping Unequipped C2 Byte (in Hex) 02 13 16 00
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
D-1
D Board Configuration Parameters
As a path status and signal identification byte, the V5 byte detects the bit error and indicates the remote fault and failure in the lower order path. Table D-2 lists the mapping relation between the service type and V5 byte. Table D-2 Mapping relation between the service type and V5 byte Input Service Type Asynchronization Unequipped or supervisory unequipped V5 Byte (in Hex) 02 00
The attributes of an SDH interface cover the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer 3 attributes and advanced attributes. To configure an SDH interface, configure the physical parameters, link layer parameters and network layer parameters. The attributes of an Ethernet interface cover the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer 3 attributes, advanced attributes and flow control. To configure an Ethernet interface, configure the physical parameters, link layer parameters, network layer parameters and flow control schemes. To configure the ALS is to set the parameters of the optical interface. To ensure the valid utilization of the path, the spare timeslots are eliminated when the signals are encapsulated into the network. In this way, the TDM frame is partially stuffed. To recover the TDM frame at the service sink, the spare timeslots eliminated during encapsulation are added again.
l l
Parameters of the Interface Board

The configurable parameters of the interface board are the J0, J1, C2, SDH interface, Ethernet interface, E1 interface, ALS and spare timeslot recovery value. l The attributes of an E1 interface cover the general attributes, Layer 3 attributes and advanced attributes. To configure an E1 interface, configure the physical parameters, network layer parameters, signal frame format, clock mode and loopback scheme. For details on these parameters, see "Parameters of the Processing Board".
Parameters of the Cross-Connect and System Control Board

The configurable parameter of the SCA board is the environment monitor interface. You can set the relay control mode and enable or disable the major alarm relay and critical alarm relay to configure the environment monitor interface. For details, see OptiX PTN 3900 Configuration Guide.
D-2
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
E Glossary
E
A
Administrator Alarm alarm cable APS Asynchronous Transfer Mode The cable for generation of visual or audio alarms. See Automatic Protection Switching
Glossary
A user who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the EMLCore product. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities. A message reported when a fault is detected by a device or by the network management system during the process of polling devices. Each alarm corresponds to a recovery alarm. After a recovery alarm is received, the status of the corresponding alarm changes to cleared.
A data transfer technology based on cell, in which packets allocation relies on channel demand. It supports fast packet switching to achieve efficient utilization of network resources. The size of a cell is 53 bytes, which consist of 48-byte payload and 5-byte header. See Asynchronous Transfer Mode Automatic Protection Switching (APS) is the capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the traffic.
ATM Automatic Protection Switching
B
backup A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the purposes of database recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to data synchronization between active and standby boards. A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate. See Bit Error Rate The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).
bandwidth
BER binding strap
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
E-1
E Glossary
bit error Bit Error Rate breaker bundling
An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal. Bit error rate. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the communications quality of a network. A breaker is a device that connects/disconnects power to a circuit. An optional multiplexing operation, whereby more than one user message may be carried in the same SCTP packet.
C
Cable distribution plate A component which is used to arrange the cables in order. cable tie CE CES Circuit Emulation Service The tape used to bind the cables. See Customer Edge See Circuit Emulation Service A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original sequence at the reception end. A device that sends requests, receives responses, and obtains services from the server. A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
client Customer Edge
D
Data Communication Network DCN DDF diamond-shaped nut Digital Distribution Frame A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data Communication Function (DCF). See Data Communication Network See Digital Distribution Frame A type of nut that is used to fasten the wiring frame to the cabinet. A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection, cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.
E
E-AGGR E-LAN ejector lever Ethernet-Aggregation See Ethernet LAN A lever for removing circuit boards from an electronic chassis.
E-2
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
E Glossary
electromagnetic compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment. [NTIA]
ElectroStatic Discharge The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field. EMC ESD Ethernet See electromagnetic compatibility See ElectroStatic Discharge A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.. Ethernet LAN. A L2VPN service type that is provided for the user Ethernet in different domains over the PSN network. For the user Ethernet, the entire PSN network serves as a Layer 2 switch. See European Telecommunications Standards Institute A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
Ethernet LAN
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
F
fault A failure to implement the function while the specified operations are performed. A fault does not involve the failure caused by preventive maintenance, insufficiency of external resources and intentional settings. A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle. A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words, a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements prespecified by the sending and receiving parties.
frame
G
GE Gigabit Ethernet See Gigabit Ethernet GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.It runs at 1000Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge (switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth. In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus. Components to guide, position, and support plug-in boards.
guide rail
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
E-3
E Glossary
H
hot standby A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables and storage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. When the faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services in the faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entire system. See hot standby
HSB
I
IEC IEEE IMA Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers International Electrotechnical Commission International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector Internet Protocol See International Electrotechnical Commission See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers See Inverse Multiplexing over ATM A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters. The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and nongovernmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards. An organization that coordinates standards for telecommunications on behalf of the International Telecommunication Union (ITU). It is based in Geneva, Switzerland. Prior to 1992, the ITU-T was known as the International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee (CCITT, from the French name "Comit| consultatif international t|l|phonique et t|l|graphique"). The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791. Inverse Multiplexing over ATM. The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is referred to as an IMA group. See Internet Protocol See International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector
Inverse Multiplexing over ATM
IP ITU-T
L
L3VPN Layer3 Virtual Private Network Label Switching Router The Label Switching Router (LSR) is the basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups received in the label forwarding table.
E-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
E Glossary
LAN Laser
See Local Area Network A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor laser as the light source. See Loopback A network communications channel consisting of a circuit or transmission path and all related equipment between a sender and a receiver. A link is used to connect signaling points (SPs) and signaling transfer points (STPs) and transmit signaling messages. Linear Multiplex Section Protection A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s). A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors. The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks. See Label Switching Router
LB link
LMSP Local Area Network
Loopback Lower subrack LSR
M
Maintenance Point Merge Point Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP. Merge Point. The LSR where one or more backup tunnels rejoin the path of the protected LSP downstream of the potential failure. The same LSR may be both an MP and a PLR simultaneously. See Merge Point See Maintenance Point See Multi-Protocol Label Switch A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing.
MP MP MPLS Multi-Protocol Label Switch
N
N63E cabinet NE network element A cabinet which is 600 mm in width and 300 mm in depth, compliant with the standards of the ETSI. See network element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control board which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the system control board. This is an internal interface within a network linking two or more elements.
Network to Network Interface

Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
E-5
E Glossary
NNI
See Network to Network Interface
O
OAM ODF Operation, Administration and Maintenanc See Operation, Administration and Maintenanc See Optical Distribution Frame Operation, Administration and Maintenance. A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation, activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers. A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
Optical Distribution Frame
P
packet 1. A sequence of binary digits including data and call control signals that is switched as a composite whole. The data, call control signals, and possibly error control information, are arra nged in a specific format. 2. A short block of data of fixed length and destination information. It is the information transmission unit of the packet switching network. The maximum length of the information packet reaches 8000 bit. The information packet can be tranfered from one metwork to another network. 3. Data packets and local packets. Logical grouping of information that includes a header containing control information and (usually) user data. Packets are most often used to refer to network layer units of data. A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN. See Printed Circuit Board See Power Distribution Unit Protocol Data Unit
Packet over SDH/ SONET PCB PDU PDU
Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack. POS Power Distribution Unit PPP Printed Circuit Board See Packet over SDH/SONET The power distribution unit performs AC or DC power distribution. See Point-to-Point Protocol A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate. An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW. Packet Transport Network
Pseudo wire
PTN
E-6
E Glossary
PW
See Pseudo wire
R
Radio Network Controller RNC route A device used in the RNS to control the usage and integrity of radio resources. See Radio Network Controller A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/ IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.
S
SDH signal cable Synchronous Digital Hierarchy See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Common signal cables cover the E1cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signal cable. SDH is a transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
T
T63 cabinet TPS Tributary Protection Switch Tunnel A cabinet which is 600 mm in width and 300 mm in depth, compliant with the standards of the ETSI. See Tributary Protection Switch Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board. A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs. In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel.
U
Upload Upper subrack upward cabling An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the T2000. The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the T2000 side. The subrack close to the top of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks. Cables or fibres connect the cabinet with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)
E-7
E Glossary
V
Virtual Local Area Network VLAN A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated with switched Ethernet. See Virtual Local Area Network
E-8
Issue 04 (2010-10-15)

OptiX PTN 3900 Hardware Description - (V100R002C01 04)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX PTN 3900 Hardware Description - (V100R002C01 04)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX PTN 3900 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series V100R002C01

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document

About This Document

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document

Changes in Issue 04 (2010-10-15) Based on Product Version V100R002C01

Changes in Issue 03 (2010-05-20) Based on Product Version V100R002C01

Updates the number of E-Line services supported by the EG16.

About This Document

Changes in Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C01

Changes in Issue 01 (2010-01-15) Based on Product Version V100R002C01

About This Document

Adds the detailed description of the EFG4.

Changes in Issue 02 (2009-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00

About This Document

Changes in Issue 01 (2009-06-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00

Changes in Issue 08 (2009-06-01) Based on Product Version V100R001

Changes in Issue 07 (2009-04-20) Based on Product Version V100R001

Changes in Issue 06 (2009-03-16) Based on Product Version V100R001

About This Document

Known defects are fixed.

Changes in Issue 05 (2009-02-20) Based on Product Version V100R001

About This Document

Changes in Issue 04 (2009-01-10) Based on Product Version V100R001

Changes in Issue 03 (2008-10-20) Based on Product Version V100R001

About This Document

Changes in Issue 02 (2008-08-20) Based on Product Version V100R001

Changes in Issue 01 (2008-05-10) Based on Product Version V100R001

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards..........................................................................7-1

9 Power Supply and Fan Boards.................................................................................................9-1

11 Pluggable Optical Modules..................................................................................................11-1

12 Pluggable Electrical Module................................................................................................12-1 13 Cables.......................................................................................................................................13-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Figure 1-1 Hardware structure of the OptiX PTN 3900

Cabinet Power distribution unit

Cable distribution plate

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2.1 Cabinet Types

The OptiX PTN 3900 does not support outdoor installation.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2.2 Cabinet Indicators and DC Power Distribution

Cabinet indicator DC PDU

2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Critical alarm indicator, which is red

Major alarm indicator, which is orange

Minor alarm indicator, which is yellow

2.2.2 DC Power Distribution Unit

Figure 2-4 Appearance of the front panel of the DC PDU

A. Area A of the DC PDU B. Area B of the DC PDU

Area A and area B serve as mutual backups.